rotary actuators - phd

3-i

3-IN

DEX

SOLUTIONS FORINDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION

(800) 624-8511www.phdinc.com/products/rotaryactuatorsCAT-03

ROTARY ACTUATORSSERIES RL, RA, RI, RF, MINIATURE,AIR/OIL TANDEM, AND MULTI-POSITION

INDEX:Series RL

Pages 3A-1 to 3A-17

Series RAPages 3B-1 to 3B-15

Miniature(Series 0180 & 0183)

Pages 3C-1 to 3C-6

Series 1000-8000Pages 3C-8 to 3C-12

Air/Oil TandemPages 3C-13 to 3C-19

Multi-PositionPages 3C-20 to 3C-28

Engineering DataPages 3C-29 to 3C-31

Plumbing SchematicsPages 3C-32 and 3C-33

Start-up ProcedurePages 3C-34

OptionsPages 3C-35 to 3C-40

Series RIPages 3D-1 to 3D-26

Series RFPages 3D-27 to 3D-43

SERIES RLROTARY ACTUATORS

SERIES RAROTARY ACTUATORS

Exceptional Selection of Models, Sizes, Options, and Price Range

SERIES RIROTARY ACTUATORS

MINIATUREROTARY

ACTUATORS

SERIES 2000-8000AIR/OIL TANDEM

SERIES 2000-8000MULTI-POSITION

ROTARY ACTUATORS

SERIES RFROTARY ACTUATORS

1000-8000 MULTI-POSITIONACTUATORS

NEW!NEW!

3-ii

3-IN

DEX


(800) 624-8511www.phdinc.com/products/rotaryactuators CAT-03

ROTARY ACTUATORSSERIES 1000-8000

Series 1000-8000 Rotary Actuators are a rugged line forpneumatic or hydraulic service. These units have a wide range ofrotations, options, and shaft configurations allowing them to beconfigured for most rotary applications. Standard rotations range upto 450° with torques to 31,800 in-lb.

Sizes: 8Operating Media: Pneumatic, 150 psi [10 bar] maximum,Hydraulic, 1500 psi [100 bar] maximumMaximum Torque Output: 57 to 31,800 in-lb [6.4 to 3595 Nm]

ROTARY ACTUATORSSERIES RL ROTARY ACTUATORS

PHD Series RL Rotary Actuators cover a wide range of sizesfrom miniature 12 mm bore units to 63 mm bore units. Theseactuators have a very high torque to envelope ratio and are capableof very high rotation velocities. Built-in optional shock absorbersprovide smooth deceleration of external loads.

Sizes: 8Operating Media: Pneumatic, 150 psi [10 bar] maximumMaximum Torque Output: 4.4 to 544 in-lb [.49 to 61.5 Nm]

MINIATURE ROTARY ACTUATORSSERIES 018075, 018050, & 0180375

PHD Miniature Rotary Actuators are lightweight, compactunits for small part orientation or part turn over. Adjustable stopsprovide 0° to 180° rotation for pneumatic use. Also available in 3Position and Air/Oil Tandem versions.

Sizes: 2Operating Media: Pneumatic, 150 psi [10 bar] maximumMaximum Torque Output: 9.75 to 33 in-lb [1.1 to 3.7 Nm]

SERIES RA ROTARY ACTUATORS

PHD Series RA Rotary Actuators have zero backlash at ends ofrotation providing precise rotary positioning. Large shafts, bearings,and rack provide high load-stopping capacity, exceptional radial andaxial bearing load ratings, and long unit life. Built-in optional shockabsorbers provide smooth deceleration of external loads.

Sizes: 5Operating Media: Pneumatic, 150 psi [10 bar] maximumMaximum Torque Output: 14 to 228 in-lb [1.6 to 25.8 Nm]

3-iii

3-IN

DEX


(800) 624-8511www.phdinc.com/products/rotaryactuatorsCAT-03

AIR/OIL TANDEM ROTARY ACTUATORSSERIES 2000-8000

Air/Oil Tandem Rotary Actuators provide the smooth controlof hydraulics with the simplicity of pneumatics. One end of theactuator is a closed loop hydraulic control member. The otherprovides pneumatic power to the racks.

Sizes: 4Operating Media: Pneumatic, 150 psi [10 bar] maximumMaximum Torque Output: 57 to 1,590 in-lb [6.4 to 179.8 Nm]

MULTI-POSITION ROTARY ACTUATORSSERIES 2000-8000

Multi-Position Rotary Actuators can yield three, four, or fiverotary shaft stop positions. Each position is located by means ofpositive internal stops.

Sizes: 4Operating Media: Pneumatic, 150 psi [10 bar] maximum,Hydraulic, 1500 psi [100 bar] maximumMaximum Torque Output: Ranges from 57 to 15,900 in-lb[6.4 to 1797.9 Nm]

SERIES RI ROTARY ACTUATORS

Series RI Rotary Actuators incorporate internal air passageswithin the rotary pinion manifold to allow pneumatic coupling toother devices without tubing. This protection from severed ordamaged air lines eliminates downtime.

Sizes: 3Operating Media: Pneumatic, 100 psi [7 bar] maximumMaximum Torque Output: Ranges from 32 to 414 in-lb at 87psi[3.6 to 46.8 Nm at 6 bar]

SERIES RF ROTARY ACTUATORS

Series RF Rotary Actuators feature a low profile body designwith a large output mounting hub to cover a wide range ofapplications. This rack and pinion design features high tensile steelracks and a one-piece pinion/output hub providing durability andlong life.

Sizes: 3Operating Media: Pneumatic, 100 psi [7 bar] maximumMaximum Torque Output: Ranges from 7 to 67 in-lb at 100 psi [0.8to 7.7 Nm at 7 bar]

NEW!NEW!

3A-1

3A


(800) 624-8511www.phdinc.com/rlCAT-03

ROTARY ACTUATORSSERIES RL

INDEX:Ordering Data

Page 3A-2

BenefitsPage 3A-3

DimensionsPages 3A-4 and 3A-5

Engineering DataPages 3A-6 and 3A-7

OptionsPages 3A-8 to 3A-12

AccessoriesPage 3A-13

Rotary ActuatorSelection

Pages 3A-14 to 3A-15

Application ExamplePage 3A-16 to 3A-17

Low Cost, High Torque, Compact Size

3A-2

3A


(800) 624-8511www.phdinc.com/rl CAT-03

x18

0

TO O

RDER

SPE

CIFY

:Pr

oduc

t, Se

ries,

Typ

e, D

esig

n No

.,Bo

re S

ize, A

ngle

of R

otat

ion,

and

Optio

ns.

R

NOTE

S:1)

Sho

ck p

ad a

nd/o

r ang

le a

djus

tmen

t opt

ions

not

ava

ilabl

e in

the

sam

e di

rect

ion

with

cus

hion

or s

hock

abs

orbe

r opt

ions

.2)

-E o

ptio

n no

t ava

ilabl

e on

12

mm

and

16

mm

uni

ts.

3)-M

opt

ion

not a

vaila

ble

on 1

2 m

m u

nits

and

a m

inim

um o

f90

° of r

otat

ion

requ

ired

on 1

6 m

m u

nits

.4)

For k

eyle

ss h

ub a

dapt

or k

its, s

ee p

age

3A-1

3.

L1

40-

NC-

BW-

AW-

E-

Q13

S

MIS

CELL

ANEO

USGX

-Mou

ntin

g ho

les

in P

ositi

ons

3 &

4(P

ositi

ons

2 &

3 s

tand

ard)

Q13

-Dou

ble

shaf

t ext

ensi

onU4

-Por

t Pos

ition

2U6

-P

ort P

ositi

on 3

U8-P

ort P

ositi

on 4

SWIT

CH R

EADY

E-H

all E

ffect

mag

nets

for

Serie

s 53

60 S

witc

hI

-Mag

neto

resi

stiv

em

agne

ts fo

r Ser

ies

5360

Sw

itch

M-R

eed

mag

nets

for S

erie

s53

60 S

witc

h

SHOC

K AB

SORB

ERNB

- Sho

ck b

oth

dire

ctio

nsNC

- Sho

ck c

ount

ercl

ockw

ise

NW- S

hock

clo

ckw

ise

GS- S

hock

read

y bo

th d

irect

ions

GT- S

hock

read

y co

unte

rclo

ckw

ise

GU- S

hock

read

y cl

ockw

ise

BORE

SIZ

E12

mm

16 m

m20

mm

25 m

m32

mm

40 m

m50

mm

63 m

mTY

PES

- 150

psi

[10

bar]

Air

Max

.

PROD

UCT

R - R

otar

y Ac

tuat

or

ANGL

E AD

JUST

MEN

TAB

-45

° Ang

le A

djus

tmen

t bot

h di

rect

ions

AC-

45° A

ngle

Adj

ustm

ent c

ount

ercl

ockw

ise

AW-

45° A

ngle

Adj

ustm

ent c

lock

wis

e

CUSH

ION

CONT

ROL

DB-

Cush

ion

both

dire

ctio

nsDC

-Cu

shio

n co

unte

rclo

ckw

ise

DW-

Cush

ion

cloc

kwis

eBB

-Sh

ock

Pad

both

dire

ctio

nsBC

-Sh

ock

Pad

coun

terc

lock

wis

eBW

-Sh

ock

Pad

cloc

kwis

e

ANGL

E OF

ROT

ATIO

N45

°, 90

°, 13

5°, 1

80°,

225°

, 270

°

DESI

GN N

O.1

- Im

peria

l5

- Met

ric

SERI

ESL

- Med

ium

Dut

y

-U o

ptio

ns a

pply

onl

y to

cap

s w

ith a

ngle

adju

stm

ent o

r sho

ck a

bsor

ber o

ptio

ns.

Port

Posi

tions

on

all o

ther

cap

s ar

e in

Posi

tion

5.

Switc

hes

mus

t be

orde

red

sepa

rate

ly. S

ee n

otes

2, 3

, and

pag

e 3A

-10.

Shoc

k ab

sorb

er o

ptio

ns n

ot a

vaila

ble

on 1

2 m

m, 1

6 m

m, a

nd 2

0 m

m u

nits

.

Cush

ions

and

sho

ck p

ads

not

avai

labl

e on

sam

e en

d of

act

uato

r.Sh

ock

pad

optio

ns n

ot a

vaila

ble

on 1

2 m

m u

nits

.

SHOC

K AB

SORB

ER C

HART

BORE

SIZE

25 m

m32

mm

40 m

m50

mm

63 m

m

PHD

SHOC

KAB

SORB

ER N

O.60

335-

0460

335-

0560

335-

0660

335-

0660

335-

07

ORDERING DATA: SERIES RL ROTARY ACTUATORS

3A-3

3A



BENEFITS: SERIES RL ROTARY ACTUATORS

BENEFITS

■ Series RL Rotary Actuators are available in 8 sizes and6 standard rotations with torques ranging up to 360 in-lb at100 psi [41 Nm at 7 bar] to suit a wide range of applications.

■ Series RL Rotary Actuators provide a very high torque toenvelope ratio.

■ Free-floating pistons with pressure and wear compensatingseals ensure minimum friction and long life.

■ Acetal pistons and rack bearings eliminate metal-to-metalcontact for smooth operation, long life and breakaway pressureless than 5 psi [0.35 bar].

■ Sealed ball bearings provide smooth operation and reliability.

■ The high-strength alloy steel rack and one-piece pinion shaftare designed and tested to operate for a minimum of 5 millionmaintenance-free cycles.

■ Series RL Rotary Actuators are available in both imperial andmetric versions for worldwide markets.

■ Optional built-in adjustable cushions reduce shock at end ofrotation and increase load stopping capacity.

■ Optional 45° angle adjustments make it easy to adjust tospecific rotation requirements. This provides a total range ofactuator rotations from 0° to 270°.

■ Optional built-in hydraulic shock absorbers provide smoothdeceleration of attached loads.

■ Optional keyless hub adaptors available for easy and securemounting of interface components to the actuator output shaft.These adaptors allow precise angular positioning of mounteddevices at any required angle.

■ PHD Miniature Proximity Switches mount easily into slots inthe actuator's body for interfacing with an electrical controller.Units can be specified for use with PHD’s Miniature Reed, HallEffect, or Magnetoresistive Switches.

SPECIFICATIONS 12 mm-63 mmPISTON SEALS One Block Vee per PistonPISTONS Free Floating, AcetalPINION SHAFTS One Piece Alloy SteelRACKS Alloy SteelEND CAPS Clear Anodized AluminumBODY Hardcoated AluminumBEARINGS Two Steel Ball BearingsPORTS NPT [BSP]BREAKAWAY PRESSURE 5 psi [0.35 bar]LUBRICATION Permanent for Non-Lube AirWORKING PRESSURE 150 psi [10 bar] Air Max.STANDARD ROTATIONS 45°, 90°, 135°, 180°, 225°, 270°OPTIONS Cushions, Shock Pads,

Shock Absorber,Magnets for Proximity Switches,

Angle Adjustments, Mounting Surface,Double Pinion Shaft

ACCESSORIES Keyless Hub Adaptor

3A-4

3A



DIMENSIONS: SERIES RL ROTARY ACTUATORS

All dimensions are reference only unless specifically toleranced.

1

3

2B

E SQ

EE

D

U x .067 [1.7] DP L

K

J/2J

T

P

Q

G PORT

SLOT FOROPTIONAL SWITCH

-Q13 SPECIFIEDWHEN ORDERING

R KEYRLS112 - SEE FIGURE 1 BELOWRLS116, RLS120, RLS125 - WOODRUFF KEYALL OTHERS USE SQUARE/RECTANGULAR KEY

M

M/2

H MTG THREAD4X FRONT4X BOTTOM(POS 2 & 3 ONLY)

N/2N

FA

C

C/2

NOTES:1) CIRCLED NUMBERS INDICATE PORT MOUNTING SURFACE POSITION2) NUMBERS IN [ ] ARE FOR METRIC UNITS AND ARE IN mm3) KEYWAY SHOWN AT MID ROTATION

.170

.394

FIGURE 1FOR RLS112 ONLY

QA 4

5

3A-5

3A



DIMENSIONS: SERIES RL ROTARY ACTUATORS


H

4-40 x .224[M3 x 0.5 x 6.0]

4-40 x .224[M3 x 0.5 x 6.0]

6-32 x .276[M4 x 0.7 x 8.0]

10-24 x .380[M5 x 0.8 x 10.0]

10-24 x .380[M5 x 0.8 x 10.0]

1/4-20 x .500[M6 x 1.0 x 12.0]

5/16-18 x .625[M8 x 1.25 x 16.0]

5/16-18 x .625[M8 x 1.25 x 16.0]

G PORT

10-32 THD[M5 x 0.8]

10-32 THD[M5 x 0.8]

10-32 THD[M5 x 0.8]

1/8 NPT[1/8 BSP]

1/8 NPT[1/8 BSP]

1/8 NPT[1/8 BSP]

1/4 NPT[1/4 BSP]

1/4 NPT[1/4 BSP]

EE

.482[12.25]

.541[13.75]

.630[16.0]

.758[19.25]

.866[22.0]

1.043[26.5]

1.240[31.5]

1.486[37.75]

.964[24.5]

1.082[27.5]

1.260[32.0]

1.516[38.5]

1.732[44.0]

2.086[53.0]

2.480[63.0]

2.972[75.5]

E

.448[11.5]

.530[13.5]

.532[13.5]

.623[16.0]

.788[20.0]

.866[22.0]

1.004[25.5]

1.279[32.5]

D

1.024[26.0]

1.142[29.0]

1.300[33.0]

1.556[39.5]

1.772[45.0]

2.126[54.0]

2.540[64.5]

3.168[80.5]

C

1.201[30.5]

1.378[35.0]

1.634[41.5]

1.811[46.0]

2.244[57.0]

2.579[65.5]

3.248[82.5]

3.858[98.0]

B

.374[9.5]

.374[9.5]

.374[9.5]

.473[12.0]

.473[12.0]

.473[12.0]

.650[16.5]

.650[16.5]

F

BORE SIZE

12 mm

16 mm

20 mm

25 mm

32 mm

40 mm

50 mm

63 mm

J

1.062[27.0]

1.142[29.0]

1.102[28.0]

1.378[35.0]

1.614[41.0]

2.028[51.5]

2.480[63.0]

2.716[69.0]

K

.866[22.0]

1.004[25.5]

1.220[31.0]

1.397[35.5]

1.850[47.0]

2.146[54.5]

2.677[68.0]

3.248[82.5]

L

.335[8.5]

.373[9.5]

.354[9.0]

.443[11.25]

.631[16.0]

.650[16.5]

.670[17.0]

.945[24.0]

M

1.378[35.0]

1.536[39.0]

1.516[38.5]

1.968[50.0]

2.204[56.0]

2.874[73.0]

3.308[84.0]

3.544[90.0]

N

.630[16.0]

.650[16.5]

.906[23.0]

1.182[30.0]

1.260[32.0]

1.534[39.0]

1.850[47.0]

2.204[56.0]

P [h8]

.1875[6.0]

.2495[8.0]

.3125[8.0]

.3745[10.0]

.4995[14.0]

.6245[16.0]

.7495[20.0]

.9995[30.0]

.630[16.0]

.748[19.0]

.748[19.0]

1.004[25.5]

1.260[32.0]

1.496[38.0]

1.752[44.5]

2.007[51.0]

Q

.233[5.9]

.289[7.3]

.349[8.9]

.292[7.4]

.488[12.4]

.476[12.1]

.725[18.4]

.849[21.6]

T

.7485[19.0]

.8666[22.0]

.8666[22.0]

1.0241[26.0]

1.2603[32.0]

1.3785[35.0]

1.6540[42.0]

2.1659[55.0]

UR

SEE FIGURE 1[2.0 SQ x 10.0]

203 WOODRUFF[3.0 SQ x 14.0]



1/8 SQ x 3/4[5.0 SQ x 20.0]

3/16 SQ x 1.00[5.0 SQ x 25.0]

3/16 SQ x 1-1/4[6.0 SQ x 30.0]

1/4 SQ x 1-3/8[8.0 x 7.0 x 36.0 RECT]

A2.047 [52.0]2.579 [65.5]3.110 [79.0]2.461 [62.5]3.091 [78.5]3.563 [90.5]2.854 [72.5]3.248 [82.5]3.957 [100.5]3.504 [89.0]3.976 [101.0]4.921 [125.0]3.720 [94.5]4.705 [119.5]5.866 [149.0]4.626 [117.5]5.925 [150.5]7.500 [190.0]5.295 [134.5]6.850 [174.0]8.661 [220.0]6.535 [166.0]8.504 [216.0]10.846 [275.5]

NOMINAL ROTATION45° OR 90°

135° OR 180°225° OR 270°45° OR 90°

135° OR 180°225° OR 270°45° OR 90°

135° OR 180°225° OR 270°45° OR 90°

135° OR 180°225° OR 270°45° OR 90°

135° OR 180°225° OR 270°45° OR 90°

135° OR 180°225° OR 270°45° OR 90°

135° OR 180°225° OR 270°45° OR 90°

135° OR 180°225° OR 270°

BORE SIZE

12 mm

16 mm

20 mm

25 mm

32 mm

40 mm

50 mm

63 mm

Numbers in [ ] are for metric units and are in mm.

.312[7.92]

.437[11.1]

.437[11.1]

QA

—

—

—

—

—

3A-6

3A



MAXIMUMBORE SIZE BACKLASH

12 mm & 16 mm 1° 30'20 mm & 25 mm 1° 0'32 mm & 40 mm 0° 45'50 mm & 63 mm 0° 30'

MAXIMUMBORE SIZE VELOCITY

12 mm & 16 mm 180°/.030 sec20 mm, 25 mm, & 32 mm 180°/.050 sec

40 mm 180°/.060 sec50 mm & 63 mm 180°/.075 sec

ENGINEERING DATA: SERIES RL ROTARY ACTUATORS

PRESSURE AND BREAKAWAY RATINGSAll Series RL Rotary Actuators have a maximum pressure

rating of 150 psi [10 bar] with a 5 psi [0.3 bar] breakaway pressure.They are for pneumatic application only.

OPERATING TEMPERATURESStandard Series RL Rotary Actuators are recommended for use

in temperatures from -20° to +180°F [-28° to +82°C]. Consult PHDfor operation at temperatures outside this range.

LUBRICATIONAll units are pre-lubricated at assembly for operation with

non-lubricated air. Service life can be extended by periodiclubrication of the rack and pinion with high grade bearing greaseand by using lubricated air.

ANGLE OF ROTATIONStandard angles of rotation are 45°, 90°, 135°, 180°, 225°, and

270°. Consult PHD for other rotation requirements. All units withoptional angle adjustments provide 90° of total angle adjustment.

ROTATIONAL TOLERANCEThe total rotational tolerance of the Series RL Rotary Actuator

is +10°, -0° on specified rotation.

BACKLASH

DISPLACEMENTin2

.18

.31

.49

.761.251.953.044.83

mm2

112.90201.29314.19490.32804.19

1256.641963.483117.41

in3/DEG. ROT..0005.001.002.004.008.017.032.063

mm3/DEG. ROT.8.19

16.3932.7765.55

131.10278.58524.39

1032.38

BORESIZE

12 mm16 mm20 mm25 mm32 mm40 mm50 mm63 mm

GEAR RACKS45°-270°

11111111

PISTON DIAMETER PISTON AREA

RL SPECIFICATIONS

in.47.63.79.981.261.581.972.48

mm1216202532405063

BEARING LOADS TABLEDISTANCEBETWEENBEARINGS

RADIALBEARING LOAD

CAPACITY

AXIALBEARING LOAD

CAPACITYBORESIZE


in.65.73.891.111.281.601.932.52

mm16.618.622.628.132.640.649.164.1

N7341023102314231734186829354114

lb165230230320390420660925

N11517317348971181812672001

lb263939110160184285450

ROTATIONAL VELOCITY

3A-7

3A



ENGINEERING DATA: SERIES RL ROTARY ACTUATORSTHEORETICAL TORQUE OUTPUT

BORE SIZE12 mm

INPUTPRESSURE 16 mm 20 mm 25 mm 32 mm 40mm 50 mm 63 mmpsi405060708090100120130140150

bar2.73.44.14.85.56.26.88.28.99.610

in-lb1.21.51.82.02.32.62.93.53.84.14.4

Nm.13.16.20.23.26.30.33.40.43.46.49

in-lb2.53.13.74.45.05.66.27.58.18.79.4

Nm.28.35.42.49.56.64.71.85.92.991.1

in-lb4.96.17.38.59.7111215161718

Nm.55.69.83.961.11.21.41.71.81.92.1

in-lb9.111141618212327303234

Nm1.01.31.61.82.12.32.63.13.43.63.9

in-lb1923283337424756616570

Nm2.12.63.23.74.24.85.36.36.97.47.9

in-lb39495868788897117127136146

Nm4.45.56.67.78.89.91113141517

in-lb7391110128146164183219237256274

Nm8.310121417192125272931

in-lb145181217254290326362435471507544

Nm1620252933374149535761

45° OR 90°

ROTARY ACTUATOR WEIGHT TABLENOMINAL ROTATION

lb0.30.40.40.40.50.60.70.90.91.11.41.41.72.02.42.63.23.65.26.06.89.2

10.410.6

kg0.130.180.180.180.230.270.320.410.410.500.640.640.770.911.071.171.451.632.362.723.084.174.714.81

lb0.40.40.50.50.60.70.80.91.01.21.51.52.02.32.73.34.04.36.06.77.6

10.511.812.0

kg0.180.180.220.220.270.320.360.410.450.540.680.680.911.041.221.491.811.952.723.043.454.765.355.44

lb0.40.50.50.60.70.70.91.01.11.41.61.72.32.73.04.34.95.36.97.78.5

12.313.513.7

kg0.180.220.220.270.320.320.410.450.500.640.700.801.041.221.361.952.222.403.133.493.855.576.126.21

TYPE OFUNIT

PLAINCUSHION

ANGLE ADJUSTMENTPLAIN

CUSHIONANGLE ADJUSTMENT

PLAINCUSHION



PLAINCUSHION



PLAINCUSHION



BORESIZE

12 mm

16 mm

20 mm

25 mm

32 mm

40 mm

50 mm

63 mm

135° OR 180° 225° OR 270°

NOTE: Units with shock pad options are the same approximate weight as plain units. Unitswith shock absorber options are the same approximate weight as units with angle adjustment.

3A-8

3A



OPTIONS: SERIES RL ROTARY ACTUATORS

AB 45° ANGLE ADJUSTMENTBOTH DIRECTIONS

AC 45° ANGLE ADJUSTMENTCOUNTERCLOCKWISE DIRECTION

AW 45° ANGLE ADJUSTMENTCLOCKWISE DIRECTION

Angle adjustment screws each allow the nominal angle ofrotation to be reduced by up to 45° from each end of rotation (-ACor -AW options). With adjustments at both ends of the unit, a totalreduction of 90° (-AB option) can be achieved. Angle adjustment isavailable in either or both directions.

NOTE: Angle adjustment options are not available with cushionor shock absorber options in the same direction.

F

G PORT

Y HEX

T

EE

E SQ

THREAD SEAL AND WASHER

ANGLE ADJUSTMENT SCREW

V MAX

BORE SIZE12 mm16 mm20 mm25 mm32 mm40 mm50 mm63 mm

NOMINAL ROTATION45°, 90°, 180°, 270°45°, 90°, 180°, 270°45°, 90°, 180°, 270°45°, 90°, 180°, 270°45°, 90°, 180°, 270°45°, 90°, 180°, 270°45°, 90°, 180°, 270°45°, 90°, 180°, 270°

E.964 [24.5]1.082 [27.5]1.260 [32.0]1.516 [38.5]1.732 [44.0]2.086 [53.0]2.480 [63.0]2.972 [75.5]

EE.482 [12.25].541 [13.75].630 [16.0].758 [19.25].866 [22.0]1.043 [26.5]1.240 [31.5]1.486 [37.75]

F.552 [14.0].552 [14.0].552 [14.0].827 [21.0].827 [21.0].984 [25.0]1.024 [26.0]1.024 [26.0]

G10-32 THD [M5 x 0.8]10-32 THD [M5 x 0.8]10-32 THD [M5 x 0.8]

1/8 NPT [1/8 BSP]1/8 NPT [1/8 BSP]1/8 NPT [1/8 BSP]1/4 NPT [1/4 BSP]1/4 NPT [1/4 BSP]

T.233 [5.9].289 [7.3].349 [8.9].292 [7.4].488 [12.4].476 [12.1].725 [18.4].849 [21.6]

V.511 [13.0].649 [16.5].747 [19.0].767 [19.5].984 [25.0]1.421 [36.1]1.378 [35.0]1.378 [35.0]

Y4 mm4 mm6 mm6 mm8 mm10 mm10 mm10 mm


BB SHOCK PAD INSTALLEDBOTH DIRECTIONS

BC SHOCK PAD INSTALLEDCOUNTERCLOCKWISE DIRECTION

BW SHOCK PAD INSTALLEDCLOCKWISE DIRECTION

Polyurethane shock pads for noise reduction and absorption ofshock at ends of rotation are available on each end of Series RLRotary Actuators. Reduction of shock permits higher pistonvelocities for shorter cycle times. Noise reduction is beneficial forthe working environment. See pages 3A-14 through 3A-15 forinformation on unit stopping capacity.

NOTE: Shock pad options are not available on 12 mm units, orwith shock absorber or cushion options in the same direction.

SHOCK PADS


3A-9

3A




DB

DC CUSHION COUNTERCLOCKWISEDIRECTION

DW

1

3

2

E SQUARE

EE

T

G PORTF E/2

CUSHION CLOCKWISE

CUSHIONCOUNTERCLOCKWISE

4

CUSHION BOTH DIRECTIONS

CUSHION CLOCKWISE DIRECTION

PHD Cushions allow smooth deceleration at the end of rotation.When a cushion is activated, the remaining volume of air in theexhaust side of the actuator is expelled through an adjustable needlevalve, controlling the rate of deceleration of the pinion shaft. Theeffective cushion length is approximately 40° at the end of fullnominal rotation. See pages 3A-14 through 3A-15 for informationon unit stopping capacity.

Cushion performance will not be realized on units of 45° orless due to 40° of effective cushion length.

NOTE: Cushion options are not available with angle adjustment,shock absorber, or shock pad options in the same direction.

BORE SIZE12 mm16 mm20 mm25 mm32 mm40 mm50 mm63 mm

NOMINAL ROTATION45°, 90°, 135°,180°, 225°, 270°45°, 90°, 135°,180°, 225°, 270°45°, 90°, 135°,180°, 225°, 270°45°, 90°, 135°,180°, 225°, 270°45°, 90°, 135°,180°, 225°, 270°45°, 90°, 135°,180°, 225°, 270°45°, 90°, 135°,180°, 225°, 270°45°, 90°, 135°,180°, 225°, 270°

E.964 [24.5]

1.082 [27.5]1.260 [32.0]1.516 [38.5]1.732 [44.0]2.086 [53.0]2.480 [63.0]2.972 [75.5]

EE.226 [5.75].728 [18.5].856 [21.75]1.043 [26.5]1.161 [29.5]1.457 [37.0]1.752 [44.5]1.998 [50.75]

F.728 [18.5].827 [21.0].866 [22.0]1.004 [25.5]1.063 [27.0]1.142 [29.0]1.260 [32.0]1.260 [32.0]

G10-32 THD [M5 x 0.8]10-32 THD [M5 x 0.8]10-32 THD [M5 x 0.8]

1/8 NPT [1/8 BSP]1/8 NPT [1/8 BSP]1/8 NPT [1/8 BSP]1/4 NPT [1/4 BSP]1/4 NPT [1/4 BSP]

T.233 [5.9].289 [7.3].349 [8.9].292 [7.4].488 [12.4].476 [12.1].725 [18.4].849 [21.6]


This option provides mounting holes on the back side(position 4) and the bottom side (position 3). Standard units aresupplied with mounting holes on the front side (position 2) and thebottom side (position 3). The mounting pattern for this option isidentical to the pattern shown in the dimensions on pages3A-4 and 3A-5.

GX MOUNTING HOLES INPOSITIONS 3 & 4


1

3

2 4

5

3A-10

3A




E MAGNETS FOR PHD MINIATUREHALL EFFECT SWITCHES

This option equips the rotary actuator with magnets on the rackfor use with PHD Series 5360 Miniature Hall Effect Switches. Theseswitches mount easily to the actuator using the “T” slot in the top ofthe body. Not available on 12 mm and 16 mm units.

.317 [8.0]

I MAGNETS FOR PHD MINIATUREMAGNETORESISTIVE SWITCHES

This option equips the rotary actuator with magnets on the rackfor use with PHD Magnetoresistive Switches. These switches mounteasily to the actuator using the “T” slot in the top of the body.Minimum sensing rotation of 90° for 12 mm and 16 mm units.

M MAGNETS FOR PHD MINIATUREREED SWITCHES

This option equips the rotary actuator with magnets on the rackfor use with PHD Series 5360 Miniature Reed Switches. Theseswitches mount easily to the actuator using the “T” slot in the top ofthe body. Not available on 12 mm units. Minimum sensing rotationof 90° for 16 mm units.

PHD Series 5360 Miniature Hall Effect, Reed, andMagnetoresistive Switches are designed specifically to providean input signal to various types of programmable controllers oflogic systems. See Switches and Sensors section for information onthe Series 5360 Miniature Switches.


PART NO.53603-1-0253604-1-0253623-153624-1

COLORYellowRedYellowRed

DESCRIPTIONNPN (Sink) 4.5-24 VDC, 2 meter cablePNP (Source) 4.5-24 VDC, 2 meter cableNPN (Sink) 4.5-24 VDC, Quick ConnectPNP (Source) 4.5-24 VDC, Quick Connect

PART NO.53602-2-0253609-2-02

53622-253629-2

COLORWhiteGreen

WhiteGreen

DESCRIPTIONSink or Source Type 4.5-24 VDC, 2 meter cableAC Type 110-120 VAC with Current Limit,2 meter cableSink or Source Type VDC, Quick ConnectAC Type 110-120 VAC, Quick Connectwith Current Limit

PART NO.53605-1-0253606-1-0253625-153626-1

COLORBlackOrangeBlackOrange

DESCRIPTIONNPN 6-24 VDC, 2 m cablePNP 6-24 VDC, 2 m cableNPN 6-24 VDC, Quick ConnectPNP 6-24 VDC, Quick Connect

3A-11

3A



Hydraulic shock absorbers provide optimum control ofdeceleration and maximum load stopping capacity. The -NB, -NC,and -NW options equip the rotary actuator with a hydraulic shockabsorber installed in the cap(s). See pages 3A-14 through 3A-15 fordetails of stopping capacity with built-in shock absorbers. Shockabsorbers are nominally effective for 45° of rotation each direction.

NOTE: The shock absorber also provides the rotationadjustment. Shock absorber options are not available on 12 mm,16 mm, or 20 mm units or with angle adjustment, cushion, or shockpad options in the same direction.


NB SHOCK ABSORBER INSTALLEDBOTH DIRECTIONS

NC SHOCK ABSORBER INSTALLEDCOUNTERCLOCKWISE DIRECTION

NW SHOCK ABSORBER INSTALLEDCLOCKWISE DIRECTION

SHOCK ABSORBER SPECIFICATIONS

BORESIZE

25 mm32 mm40 mm50 mm63 mm

PHDSHOCK

ABSORBERNUMBER60335-0460335-0560335-0660335-0660335-07

THREADTYPE

9/16-183/4-161-121-121-12

SHOCKABSORBER

WEIGHTlb.12.34.57.57.57

kg.05.15.26.26.26

in-lb2.004.0010.0016.0028.00

Nm.23.451.131.813.16

KINETICENERGY

LOADSTROKEin.19.25.29.29.37

mm4.836.357.377.379.40

in2.352.753.813.773.76

mm59.769.696.895.895.4

AMAX.

in.50.69.88.88.88

mm12.717.522.222.222.2

B ACROSSFLATS

in.827.827.9841.0241.024

mm21.021.025.026.026.0

F

SHOCK ABSORBERMOUNTING HOLE(CLOCKWISE)

PHD,Inc.

SHOCK ABSORBERREADY CAPS

SHOCK ABSORBERMOUNTING HOLE(COUNTERCLOCKWISE)

PHD,In c.

SHOCK ABSORBER(COUNTERCLOCKWISE)

SHOCK LOCK NUT

SHOCK ABSORBER(CLOCKWISE)

CAP

THREAD SEALCOVER

WASHER

B ACROSSFLATS

A MAXF

GS SHOCK ABSORBER READYBOTH DIRECTIONS

GT SHOCK ABSORBER READYCOUNTERCLOCKWISE DIRECTION

GU SHOCK ABSORBER READYCLOCKWISE DIRECTION

The -GS, -GT, and -GU options should only be ordered if theshock absorber(s) is to be supplied separately from the rotaryactuator. These options make provisions for the installation ofhydraulic shock absorbers but do not include the shock absorberunits. They include the shock sealing kit for each direction ordered.See pages 3A-14 through 3A-15 for details of stopping capacity withbuilt-in shock absorbers.

NOTE: The shock absorber also provides rotation adjustment.Shock absorbers must be installed in the rotary actuator body priorto operating the unit. Operation without shock absorbers can

damage the actuator and void the warranty. Only shock absorbersspecified by PHD should be used in Series RL Rotary Actuators. Theuse of any other shock absorbers will adversely affect actuatorperformance and service life.


3A-12

3A




Q13 DOUBLE SHAFT EXTENSION

This option provides a shaft extension out the front side(position 2) and the back side (position 4) of the actuator. Thisdouble shaft extension can be used for mounting tooling, fixturing,or for tripping external proximity switches. The one-piece pinionconstruction provides the same bearing load capacities for bothfront and rear shaft extensions.

BORE SIZE P [h8].1875[6.0].2495[8.0].3125[8.0].3745[10.0].4995[14.0].6245[16.0].7495[20.0].9995[30.0]

Q.630

[16.0].748

[19.0].748

[19.0]1.004[25.5]1.260[32.0]1.496[38.0]1.752[44.5]2.007[51.0]

RSEE FIGURE 1, PAGE 3A-4

[2.0 SQ x 10.0]203 WOODRUFF[3.0 SQ x 14.0]204 WOODRUFF[3.0 SQ x 14.0]204 WOODRUFF[3.0 SQ x 16.0]

1/8 SQ x 3/4[5.0 SQ x 20.0]3/16 SQ x 1.00[5.0 SQ x 25.0]3/16 SQ x 1-1/4[6.0 SQ x 30.0]1/4 SQ x 1-3/8

[8.0 x 7.0 x 36.0 RECT]

12 mm

16 mm

20 mm

25 mm

32 mm

40 mm

50 mm

63 mm


Port positions on units with angle adjustment or shockabsorber options are provided with a standard port in position 1.The port position may be rotated by specifying the desired option.

U6

U4

U8

PORT POSITION 3

PORT POSITION 2

PORT POSITION 4

4

5

1

3

2


BORE SIZE P [h8].1875[6.0].2495[8.0].3125[8.0].3745[10.0].4995[14.0].6245[16.0].7495[20.0].9995[30.0]

Q.630

[16.0].748

[19.0].748

[19.0]1.004[25.5]1.260[32.0]1.496[38.0]1.752[44.5]2.007[51.0]

RSEE FIGURE 1, PAGE 3A-4

[2.0 SQ x 10.0]203 WOODRUFF[3.0 SQ x 14.0]204 WOODRUFF[3.0 SQ x 14.0]204 WOODRUFF[3.0 SQ x 16.0]

1/8 SQ x 3/4[5.0 SQ x 20.0]3/16 SQ x 1.00[5.0 SQ x 25.0]3/16 SQ x 1-1/4[6.0 SQ x 30.0]1/4 SQ x 1-3/8

[8.0 x 7.0 x 36.0 RECT]

12 mm

16 mm

20 mm

25 mm

32 mm

40 mm

50 mm

63 mm


3A-13

3A



ACCESSORIES: SERIES RL ROTARY ACTUATORSKEYLESS HUB ADAPTOR KIT

This kit provides an output hub for simple attachment oftooling or other PHD actuators to the Series RL Rotary Actuators.The PHD Keyless Hub Adaptor can be precisely adjusted to anyangular and axial position on the rotary actuator shaft for maximumapplication versatility.

KEYLESS HUB ADAPTOR

GRIPPER

HUB/MTG COMPONENTNOT INCLUDED

Ø d SHAFT

BA ACROSS FLATS

(HEX)

D

L2L1

.050 [1.27 mm] MIN

IMPERIALUNIT

RLS112RLS116RLS120RLS125RLS132RLS140RLS150RLS163

TRANTORQUEPART

NUMBER62021036202105620210762021096202112620212062021606202240

PHDPART

NUMBER60264-0160264-0260264-0360264-0460264-0660264-0960264-1160264-15

din

.188

.250

.313

.375

.500

.625

.7501.00

Din

.625

.625

.750

.750

.8751.501.501.75

L1in

.750

.750

.875

.8751.001.501.50

1.875

Bin

.125

.125

.125

.125

.188

.313

.313

.438

Ain

.500

.500

.625

.625

.7501.251.251.50

TORQUEin-lb100150200250350

175025003500

MAX. TRANSMISSIBLEL2in

.375

.375

.438

.438

.500

.750

.750

.875

METRICUNIT

RLS512RLS516RLS520RLS525RLS532RLS540RLS550RLS563

TRANTORQUEPART

NUMBER62026606202680620268062027006202740620276062028116202835

PHDPART

NUMBER60265-0260265-0460265-0460265-0660265-0960265-1160265-1760265-22

dmm

688

1014162030

Dmm16.019.019.022.525.525.545.051.0

L1mm19.022.022.025.528.528.547.557.0

Bmm

335555

1113

Amm1316161922223846

TORQUENm162323304450

290580

THRUSTkN3.44.04.04.24.44.5

21.035.4

WEIGHTkg

0.0140.0280.0280.0420.5600.5600.3100.450

MAX. TRANSMISSIBLEL2

mm9.5

11.011.012.516.016.021.521.5

INSTALLATIONTORQUE ON NUT

in-lb125125150150175

120012001500

THRUSTlb

700790890925980

330044006600

WEIGHToz.50.501.01.01.58.08.0

11.0

INSTALLATIONTORQUE ON NUT

Nm19.117.017.019.822.622.6170225

NOTE: The torque required to install Trantorque adaptors exceeds the maximum value that can be safely applied to the rack and pinionassembly of Series RL Rotary Actuators. The tooling or component attached to the Trantorque adaptor must be constrained, to avoidexcessive loading on the pinion gear, while the nut is being tightened to the torque specified above. Failure to follow this procedure willresult in damage to the actuator.

DTOL.

± .0015± .0015± .0015± .0015± .0015± .0015± .003± .003

DTOL.

± .0015± .0015± .0015± .0015± .0015± .0015± .003± .003


3A-14

3A



3) Determine the stopping capacity of the actuator by using theequation given below.

a) Determine the rotational velocity by using equation A.

To select the appropriate RL rotary actuator, it is crucial to considerseveral factors including bearing capacity, torque requirements andstopping capacity of the actuator. The bearing capacities are listedon page 3A-6. To determine the required torque to rotate the load ina given time, the rotational mass moments of inertia, gravity, timeand acceleration must be taken into account. To stop an actuator, allof the same required information for torque is needed plus kineticenergy. Follow the steps below to select the appropriate RL actuator.

1) Review pages 3A-6 to make sure RL rotary actuator bearingscan withstand axial and radial bearing loads.

2) Determine the torque requirements of the actuator.

a) Determine Mass Moment of Inertia.Select the illustration from the application types on thefollowing page that most resembles your specificapplication. Several separate calculations may benecessary to fully describe your application. Using theappropriate application equation, calculate the massmoment of inertia for each type of illustration. The totalmass moment of inertia will be the sum of the individualcalculations.

b) Determine the necessary acceleration.

c) Calculate the required torque.Select the illustration from the application types on thefollowing page that most resembles your specificapplication. Several separate calculations may benecessary to fully describe your application. Using theappropriate application equation, calculate the massmoment of inertia for each type of illustration. The totaltorque will be the sum of the individual calculations.Note: Torque calculations are theoretical, an appropriatesafety factor should be considered. PHD recommends aminimum safety factor of 2 to account for friction loss,airline and valve size, and attached accessories.

Acceleration (α) =

ROTARY ACTUATOR SELECTION: RL ROTARY ACTUATORS

.0175 x Degrees of RotationTime of Rotation in seconds

ROTATIONAL VELOCITY EQUATIONS

KINETIC ENERGY BASIC EQUATIONKE = 1/2 Jm ω2 (Fa)

Average Velocity (rad/sec)Uniformly accelerated from rest

ω = =radsec

EQUATION A

2 x (Rotation angle in radians)

(Time of Rotation in Seconds)2

.035 x (Rotation angle in degrees)

(Time of Rotation in Seconds)2Acceleration (α) =

KINETIC ENERGY TABLEKE MAX. WITH

SHOCK ABSORBERKE MAX. WITH

CUSHIONKE MAX. WITH

SHOCK PADKE MAX.

PLAIN UNITBORESIZE


———

2.004.0010.0016.0028.00

in-lb———

.2260

.45201.13001.80803.1640

Nm.35.53.60.741.613.365.957.00

in-lb.0396.0599.0678.0836.1819.3800.6724.7910

Nm—.26.30.37.811.682.983.50

in-lb—

.0294

.0390

.0418

.0915

.1898

.3367

.3955

Nm.10.15.17.21.46.961.702.00

in-lb.0113.0170.0192.0237.0520.1085.1921.226

Nm

APPLICATIONFACTORS (Fa)

UNITDESCRIPTION

plain unitwith cushionwith shocks

44

1.35

b) Using Jm from step 2a and velocity from step 3a,calculate the kinetic energy of the application.

c) Select an appropriate Fa factor from the table below.

d) Use the KE Energy Table below to select appropriateRL actuator.

3A-15

3A



Jm = x k2Fg

g

kFg

k dim isradiusof rod

Jm = x12

Fg

ga2 + 3k2

( ) ( )Fg1

gJm = x (4a2 + 3k2)

12+ Fg2

g(4b2 + 3k2)

12

( )k2Jm = +L2

3Fg

gxx 1

4


b-a2

x

Tg = [(Jm x α) + (Fg x k)] x SFT = Jm x α x SF

kk

Jm = x k2

2Fg

g

DiskEnd mounted on center

DiskMounted on center

L

k

a

aFg1

Fg2

b

a2 + b2

12Jm = xFg

g

Rectangular PlateMounted on center

Rectangular PlateMounted off center

Solid SphereMounted on center

RodMounted on center

RodMounted off center

Jm = x 4a2 + c2

12+ x 4b2 + c2

12Fg1

gFg2

g

c Fg2

a

Fg1b

Jm = x x k225

Fg

g

Point Load

UNBALANCED LOADSTg = [(Jm x α) + [(Fg2 - Fg1) x (a + ( ))]] x SF

T = Jm x α x SF

LOAD ORIENTATION

Tg = Rotating Vertically(with gravity)

T = Rotating Horizontally(without gravity)

UNBALANCED LOADS

a

b

ROTARY ACTUATOR SELECTION: SERIES RLIMPERIAL UNITS:Jm = Rotational Mass Moment of Inertia (in-lb-sec2) (Dependent on physical size of object and weight)g = Gravitational Constant = 386.4 in/sec2 Fg = Weight of Load (lb) k = Radius of Gyration (in)T = Torque required to rotate load (in-lbs) α = Acceleration (rad/sec2) t = time (sec)SF = Safety Factor

METRIC UNITS:Jm = Rotational Mass Moment of Inertia (N-m-sec2) (Dependent on physical size of object and weight)g = Gravitational Constant = 9.81 m/sec2 Fg = Weight of Load (N) k = Radius of Gyration (m)T = Torque required to rotate load (N-m) α = Acceleration (rad/sec2) t = time (sec)M = Mass = Fg / g (kg) SF = Safety Factor

BALANCED LOADST = Jm x α x SF

3A-16

3A



APPLICATION EXAMPLE: SERIES RL ROTARY ACTUATORS

k1.00

[25.4]

1.75[44.45]

k

180°.1 sec

rotation angle (deg)rotational time (sec)

EXAMPLE A-Disk rotating about centerline of unit.

xJm =Fg k2

g 2 Jm =

x

xFg k2

g 2

1.05 N (.0222m) 2

9.81 2xJm =

.236 lb (.875 in) 2

386.4 2

α = .035 x rotational angle (deg)[rotational time (sec)]2

α = .035 x = 630 rad/sec2180°(.1 sec)2

Jm =

b) Using Jm from step 2a and velocity from step 3a, determineKE of the system from the basic KE equation:

IMPERIAL METRICKE = 1/2 x Jm x ω 2 x Fa KE = 1/2 x Jm x ω 2 x Fa

KE = .5 x .000234 x 31.52 x 4 KE = .5 x 2.64 x 10-5 x 31.52 x 4KE = .464 in-lbs KE = .052 N-m

IF SHOCKS ARE USED:IMPERIAL METRIC

KE = 1/2 x Jm x ω2 x Fa KE = 1/2 x Jm x ω2 x FaKE = .5 x .000234 x 31.52 x 1.35 KE = .5 x 2.64 x 10-5 x 31.52 x 1.35

KE = .157 in-lbs KE = .018 N-m

When the recommended shocks are used, three times the KE canbe handled, or conversely, a smaller unit can be used.

c) Use the KE Energy table on page 3A-14 to select theappropriate RL actuator. The following units satisfy therequirements. 32 mm plain, 32 mm with shock pad,or 25 mm with cushions.

T = Jm x α x 2

T = 2.64 x 10-5 x 630 x 2 = .03 N-m

Numbers in [ ] are for metricunits and are in mm.

1) Determine load information:

IMPERIAL METRICROTATION ANGLE / TIME 180°/.10 sec 180°/.10 secLOAD Aluminum Disk Aluminum DiskWEIGHT .236 lb 1.05 NMASS .107 KgPRESSURE 87 psi 6 barSAFETY FACTOR 2 2

2) Determine torque requirement for the application:

a) Calculate Rotational Mass Moment of Inertia (Jm) usingequations given on page 3A-15.

IMPERIAL METRIC

Jm = .000234 in-lb-sec2 Jm = 2.64 x 10-5 N-m-sec2

b) Determine required acceleration of the load:

c) Calculate required torque:

IMPERIAL METRIC

T = Jm x α x SF

T = .000234 x 630 x 2 = .29 in-lbs

Review torque chart on page 3A-7 for 87 psi [6 bar] to selectminimum actuator based on torque.

3) Determine the stopping capacity of the actuator for theapplication:

a) Determine the average rotational velocity using Equation Aon page 3A-14.

ω = rad/sec = .0175 x

ω = .0175 x = 31.5 rad/sec

3A-17

3A



APPLICATION EXAMPLE: SERIES RL ROTARY ACTUATORS

2"[50.8]

(k)

1lb[4.45 N]

2"[50.8]

(b)

6" [152.4] (a)1) Determine load information:

IMPERIAL METRICROTATION ANGLE / TIME 180°/.5 sec 180°/.5 secRECTANGULAR PLATE Steel Plate Steel PlateWEIGHT 1.698 lb 7.55 NMASS .77 KgPOINT LOAD 1 lb 4.45 N

(2" off center) (50.8 mm off center)PRESSURE 87 psi 6 barSAFETY FACTOR 2 2


a) Calculate Rotational Mass Moment of Inertia (Jm) usingequations given on page 3A-15.

POINT LOADIMPERIAL METRIC

Jm = .0104 in-lb-sec2 Jm = .00117 N-m-sec2

RECTANGULAR PLATEIMPERIAL METRIC


Total Jm Total Jm = .0146+.0104=.025 in-lb-sec2 = .00165+.00117=.00282N-m-sec2




T = [(Jm x α)+(Fg x k)] x 2

T = [(.0140 x 25.2) + (1 x 2)] x 2

T = 4.5 in-lbs

Jm = x7.55 (.1524)2+(.0508)2

9.81 12

Jm = x

x (.0508 m)2

EXAMPLE B-Combination of rectangular plate mounted oncenter and a point load mounted off center.

4.45 N9.81

Jm =

Fg

g x k2Jm =

Jm = x

1 lb386.4

Fg

g x k2Jm =

x (2 in)2Jm =

1.698 62+22

386.4 12

Fg a2+b2

g 12

Jm = x

α = .035 x rotational angle (deg)[time (sec)]2

α = .035 x = 25.2 rad/sec2180°(.5 sec)2


180°.5 sec

Fg a2+b2

g 12

T = Jm x α x SF

T = .00166 x 25.2 x 2 = .084 N-m

Total T = .51 + .084 = .594 N-m


T = Jm x α x SF

T = .0146 x 25.2 x 2 = .74 in-lbs

Total T = 4.5 + .74 = 5.24 in-lbs

Review torque chart on page 3A-7 for 87 psi [6 bar] to selectminimum actuator based on torque.


a) Determine the average rotational velocity using Equation Aon page 3A-14.

ω = .0175 x ω = .0175 x = 6.3 rad/sec


IMPERIAL METRICKE = 1/2 x Jm x ω 2 x Fa KE = 1/2 x Jm x ω 2 x FaKE = .5 x .025 x 6.32 x 4 KE = .5 x .00282 x 6.32 x 4

KE = 1.98 in-lbs KE = .224 N-m


KE = 1/2 x Jm x ω 2 x Fa KE = 1/2 x Jm x ω 2 x FaKE = .5 x .025 x 6.32 x 1.35 KE = .5 x .00282 x 6.32 x 1.35

KE = .66 in-lbs KE = .076 N-m

When the recommended shocks are used, three times the KE canbe handled, or conversely, a smaller rotary unit can be used.

c) Use the KE Energy table on page 3A-14 to select theappropriate RL actuator. The following units satisfy therequirements: 63 mm plain, 50 mm with shock pads, and40 mm with cushions.


T = [(Jm x α)+(Fg x k)] x SF

T = [(.00117 x 25.2) + (4.45 x .0508)] x 2

T = .51 N-m

3B

3B-1SOLUTIONS FORINDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION

(800) 624-8511www.phdinc.com/raCAT-03

ROTARY ACTUATORSSERIES RA

INDEX:Ordering Data

Page 3B-2

BenefitsPage 3B-3

DimensionsPages 3B-4 and 3B-5

Engineering DataPages 3B-6 and 3B-7

OptionsPages 3B-8 to 3B-11


Pages 3B-12 to 3B-13

Application ExamplePage 3B-14 to 3B-15

High Load and Stopping Capacity, Zero Backlash

3B


(800) 624-8511www.phdinc.com/ra CAT-03

ORDERING DATA: SERIES RA ROTARY ACTUATORS

- Hal

l Effe

ct m

agne

ts fo

r Ser

ies

5360

Sw

itch

- Mag

neto

resi

stiv

e m

agne

ts fo

r Ser

ies

5360

Sw

itch

- Ree

d m

agne

ts fo

r Ser

ies

5360

Sw

itch

E I M

- Out

put h

ub- O

utpu

t hub

with

hol

low

pin

ion

shaf

t (

Avai

labl

e on

32

mm

–50

mm

uni

ts o

nly)

- Spl

ined

out

put s

haft

only

Q10

Q19

Q22

PHD

SHOC

KAB

SORB

ER N

O.56

722-

0156

722-

0256

722-

0356

722-

0456

722-

05

BORE

SIZE

20 m

m25

mm

32 m

m40

mm

50 m

m

- Cus

hion

bot

h di

rect

ions

- Cus

hion

cou

nter

cloc

kwis

e- C

ushi

on c

lock

wis

e

DB DC DW

1 5- I

mpe

rial

- Met

ric

PROD

UCT

R- R

otar

y Ac

tuat

orTY

PES

- 150

psi

[10

bar]

Air

Max

.

1S

AR

20

TO O

RDER

SPE

CIFY

:Pr

oduc

t, Se

ries,

Typ

e, D

esig

n No

., Bo

re S

ize,

Angl

e of

Rot

atio

n, a

nd O

ptio

ns.

PORT

CON

TROL

- Bot

h di

rect

ions

- Cou

nter

cloc

kwis

e- C

lock

wis

e

PB PC PW

20 m

m (.

78")

25 m

m (1

.0")

32 m

m (1

.25"

)40

mm

(1.5

")50

mm

(2.0

")

BORE

SIZ

E

E –

Q10

x–

––

180

PBNB

SWIT

CH R

EADY

OUTP

UT T

YPES

Switc

hes

mus

t be

orde

red

sepa

rate

ly. S

ee p

age

3B-9

.

DESI

GN N

O.SE

RIES

A- S

tand

ard

Duty

CUSH

ION

CONT

ROL

SHOC

K AB

SORB

ER- S

hock

inst

alle

d bo

th d

irect

ions

- Sho

ck in

stal

led

coun

terc

lock

wis

e- S

hock

inst

alle

d cl

ockw

ise

- Sho

ck re

ady

both

dire

ctio

ns- S

hock

read

y co

unte

rclo

ckw

ise

- Sho

ck re

ady

cloc

kwis

e

NB NC NW GS GT GU Shoc

k ab

sorb

ers

mus

t be

orde

red

sepa

rate

ly fo

r -GS

, -GT

, and

-GU

optio

ns.

225°

and

270

° uni

ts a

re s

tand

ard

shoc

k re

ady.

ANGL

E OF

ROT

ATIO

N45

°, 90

°, 13

5°, 1

80°,

225°

, 270

°

SHOC

K AB

SORB

ER C

HART

!Op

tions

may

affe

ct u

nit l

engt

h.Se

e un

it di

men

sion

and

opt

ions

page

s fo

r add

ers.

3B



BENEFITS: SERIES RA ROTARY ACTUATORS

BENEFITS

■ Series RA Rotary Actuators are available in five sizes and sixstandard rotations with torques ranging to 150 in-lb at 100 psi[17 Nm at 7 bar] to cover a wide range of applications.

■ All units have zero backlash at ends of rotation for preciserotary positioning.

■ The high strength steel alloy rack and one-piece pinion shaftare designed and tested to operate for a minimum of 10 millionmaintenance-free cycles.

■ Free floating pistons with pressure and wear compensatingseals provide long life and low friction with a 5 psi [0.3 bar]breakaway pressure.

■ Oversize sealed ball bearings and large pinion shaftsensure shaft stability under heavy loading and high loadstopping ability.

■ Built-in standard angle adjustments, of +10°, -45° on eachnominal angle rotation, make it easy to adjust to specificrotation requirements. This provides a total range of actuatorrotations from 0° to 280°. (+5° -22-1/2° from each end)

■ Mounting patterns on three surfaces provide flexibility indesign and unit mounting.

■ Units with rotations of 180° or less have all controladjustments and ports on top of the actuator saving space andeasing accessibility.

■ Optional built-in hydraulic shock absorbers provide smoothdeceleration of external loads and allow for greater loadstopping capacity.

■ Optional built-in flow controls save space and provide constantand accurate control of the rotation speed.

■ Optional built-in adjustable cushions reduce end-of-rotationshock and increase the unit's stopping capacity.

■ Optional hubbed pinion shaft provides a flat mounting surfacewith a four bolt pattern for easy mounting of tooling andaccessories to the actuator's shaft.

■ Miniature PHD Proximity Switches mount easily into slots inthe actuator's body for interfacing with an electrical controller.Units can be specified for use with PHD’s Miniature Reed orHall Effect Switches.

■ Series RA Rotary Actuators are available in both metricand imperial versions allowing flexibility in design for aworld market.

SPECIFICATIONS 20 mm-50 mmPISTON SEALS One Block Vee per PistonPISTONS Free Floating, Acetal MaterialPINION SHAFTS One Piece Alloy SteelRACKS Alloy SteelEND CAPS Clear Anodized AluminumBODY Hardcoated AluminumBEARINGS Two Steel Ball BearingsPORTS NPT [BSP]LUBRICATION Permanent for Non-Lube AirWORKING PRESSURE 150 psi [10 bar] Air Max.STANDARD ROTATIONS 45°, 90°, 135°, 180°, 225°, 270°OPTIONS Port Controls®, Cushions,

Output Hub, Shock Absorber,Magnets for Proximity Switches

3B



J

Q

2X ANGLE ADJUSTMENT

EE/2

B

D MAX

MA – 4X FRONTMB – 4X BACK

Ø NB ± .0005 x NC DP[Ø NB ± 0.013] 1X FRONT & BACK

Q/2

RR/2

Ø V

SEAT FOR #204WOODRUFF KEY

T

S

F

G* AY

Y/24X THRU AND C'BOREFOR L SHCS

2X X NPT [BSP] PORT

KEYWAY FORW KEY

PA O

K

UZ

H C

SLOT FOR OPTIONALHALL/REED SWITCH

.437[11.10]

NOTES:1) *G DIMENSION INCREASES WITH CUSHION OPTION. SEE PAGE 3B-8.2) KEYWAY SHOWN AT MID-ROTATION3) NUMBERS IN [ ] ARE FOR METRIC UNITS AND ARE IN mm.

FOR RAS120 ONLY

DIMENSIONS: SERIES RA ROTARY ACTUATORS

45°, 90°, 135°, or 180° ROTATION UNITS

3.524 [89.5]3.760 [95.0]3.819 [97.0]

4.508 [114.5]4.606 [117.0]5.650 [143.5]5.256 [133.5]6.476 [164.5]6.300 [160.0]7.343 [186.5]

A.807

[20.5].983

[25.0]1.161[29.5]1.516[38.5]1.674[42.5]

B1.831[46.5]2.224[56.5]2.697[68.5]3.366[85.5]3.918[99.5]

C.604

[15.34].724

[18.39].920

[23.37].977

[24.82]1.191

[30.25]

D1.574[40.0]1.772[45.0]2.166[55.0]2.558[65.0]2.952[75.0]

E.394

[10.0].394

[10.0].394

[10.0].472

[12.0].472

[12.0]

F1.712[43.5]2.087[53.0]2.559[65.0]3.228[82.0]3.720[94.5]

H1.732[44.0]1.929[49.0]2.264[57.5]3.071[78.0]3.346[85.0]

K

#10[M5]#10[M5]1/4

[M6]5/16[M8]3/8

[M10]

L

.91[23.0]1.01

[25.5]1.18

[30.0]1.57

[39.75]1.74

[44.25]

J.768

[19.5].768

[19.5].768

[19.5].945

[24.0].945

[24.0]

G

10-24 x .281[M5 x 0.8 x 7]10-24 x .285

[M5 x 0.8 x 7]1/4-20 x .250

[M6 x 1.0 x 7.5]5/16-18 x .437

[M8 x 1.25 x 12]3/8-16 x .375

[M10 x 1.5 x 10]

MA2.166[55.0]2.362[60.0]2.952[75.0]3.346[85.0]3.936

[100.0]

R.276[7.0].295[7.5].335[8.5].394

[10.0].452

[11.5]

S1.180[30.0]1.378[35.0]1.772[45.0]2.164[55.0]2.362[60.0]

Q1.000[25.0]1.250[30.0]1.500[40.0]1.750[42.5]2.000[55.0]

PA2.047[52.0]2.362[60.0]2.835[72.0]3.544[90.0]3.976

[101.0]

O.085

[2.16].080

[2.03].100

[2.54].115

[2.92].125

[3.17]

NC1.3785

[35.014]1.4572

[37.013]1.8509

[47.013]2.0477

[52.012]2.4414

[62.012]

NB10-24 x .375

[M5 x 0.8 x 12.5]10-24 x .500

[M5 x 0.8 x 12.5]1/4-20 x .500

[M6 x 1.0 x 15]5/16-18 x .750

[M8 x 1.25 x 20]3/8-16 x .750

[M10 x 1.5 x 20]

MB

20 mm

25 mm

32 mm

40 mm

50 mm

BORE SIZE

20 mm

25 mm

32 mm

40 mm

50 mm

BORE SIZE

1.496[38.0]1.772[45.0]2.165[55.0]2.756[70.0]3.071[78.0]

T.04

[1.0].04

[1.0].05

[1.2].03

[0.8].07

[1.8]

U.375/.374[10 (h8)]

.4727/.4714[12 (h8)].625/.624[16 (h8)].750/.749[17 (h8)].875/.874[22 (h8)]

V1.004[25.5]1.124[28.5]1.458[37.0]1.598[40.6]1.984[50.4]

Y.06

[1.5].08

[2.0].08

[2.0].08

[2.0].10

[2.5]

Z

20 mm

25 mm

32 mm

40 mm

50 mm

BORE SIZESEE ABOVE

[3 mm SQ. x 20 mm]1/8 SQ. x 1.125

[4 mm SQ. x 25 mm]3/16 SQ. x 1.250

[5 mm SQ. x 32 mm]3/16 SQ. x 1.500

[5 mm SQ. x 35 mm]3/16 SQ. x 1.750

[6 mm SQ. x 45 mm]

W KEY

45° OR 90°135° OR 180°

45° OR 90°135° OR 180°

45° OR 90°135° OR 180°

45° OR 90°135° OR 180°

45° OR 90°135° OR 180°

NOMINAL ROTATION

1/8[1/8]1/8

[1/8]1/8

[1/8]1/8

[1/8]1/4

[1/4]

X NPT [BSP]


3B



DIMENSIONS: SERIES RA ROTARY ACTUATORS

225° or 270° ROTATION UNITS

J

MA – 4X FRONTMB – 4X BACK

D MAX

B

FFACROSS FLATS

R/2

R

2X X NPT [BSP] PORT

4X THRU ANDC'BORE FOR L SHCS

A

F

T

S

E/2E

Q/2Q

Ø NB ± .0005 x NC DP[Ø NB ± 0.013] 1X FRONT & BACK

2X ANGLEADJUSTMENT

Ø V

KEYWAY FORW KEY

OK

U

SLOT FOR OPTIONALHALL/REED SWITCH

H C

Z

PA

G*

SEAT FOR #204WOODRUFF KEY

.437[11.10]

NOTES:1) *G DIMENSION INCREASES WITH CUSHION OPTION. SEE PAGE 3B-8.2) KEYWAY SHOWN AT MID-ROTATION3) NUMBERS IN [ ] ARE FOR METRIC UNITS AND ARE IN mm.

FOR RAS120 ONLY

20 mm

25 mm

32 mm

40 mm

50 mm

BORE SIZE

20 mm

25 mm

32 mm

40 mm

50 mm

BORE SIZE

20 mm

25 mm

32 mm

40 mm

50 mm

BORE SIZE

.807[20.5].983

[25.0]1.161[29.5]1.516[38.5]1.674[42.5]

B1.831[46.5]2.224[56.5]2.697[68.5]3.366[85.5]3.918[99.5]

C1.574[40.0]1.772[45.0]2.166[55.0]2.558[65.0]2.952[75.0]

E.394

[10.0].394

[10.0].394

[10.0].472

[12.0].472

[12.0]

F1.712[43.5]2.087[53.0]2.559[65.0]3.228[82.0]3.720[94.5]

H1.732[44.0]1.929[49.0]2.264[57.5]3.071[78.0]3.346[85.0]

K

#10[M5]#10[M5]1/4

[M6]5/16[M8]3/8

[M10]

L

.91[23.0]1.01

[25.5]1.18

[30.0]1.57

[39.75]1.74

[44.25]

J.768

[19.5].768

[19.5].768

[19.5].945

[24.0].945

[24.0]

G

10-24 x .281[M5 x 0.8 x 7]10-24 x .285

[M5 x 0.8 x 7]1/4-20 x .250

[M6 x 1.0 x 7.5]5/16-18 x .437

[M8 x 1.25 x 12]3/8-16 x .375

[M10 x 1.5 x 10]

MA

4.390[111.5]5.295

[134.5]6.693

[170.0]7.736

[196.5]8.917

[226.5]

A4.39

[111.5]5.06

[128.5]5.87

[149.1]6.66

[169.1]7.32

[186.0]

D

2.166[55.0]2.362[60.0]2.952[75.0]3.346[85.0]3.936

[100.0]

R.276[7.0].295[7.5].335[8.5].394

[10.0].452

[11.5]

S

1.496[38.0]1.772[45.0]2.165[55.0]2.756[70.0]3.071[78.0]

T.04

[1.0].04

[1.0].05

[1.2].03

[0.8].07

[1.8]

U.375/.374[10 (h8)]

.4727/.4714[12 (h8)].625/.624[16 (h8)].750/.749[17 (h8)].875/.874[22 (h8)]

V.06

[1.5].08

[2.0].08

[2.0].08

[2.0].10

[2.5]

Z

1.181[30.0]1.378[35.0]1.772[45.0]2.164[55.0]2.362[60.0]

Q1.000[25.0]1.250[30.0]1.500[40.0]1.750[42.5]2.000[55.0]

PA2.047[52.0]2.362[60.0]2.835[72.0]3.544[90.0]3.976

[101.0]

O.085

[2.16].080

[2.03].100

[2.54].115

[2.92].125

[3.17]

NC1.3785

[35.014]1.4572

[37.013]1.8509

[47.013]2.0477

[52.012]2.4414

[62.012]

NB10-24 x .375

[M5 x 0.8 x 12.5]10-24 x .500

[M5 x 0.8 x 12.5]1/4-20 x .500

[M6 x 1.0 x 15]5/16-18 x .750

[M8 x 1.25 x 20]3/8-16 x .750

[M10 x 1.5 x 20]

MB

.39[10.0]

.47[12.0]

.71[18.0]

.91[23.0]

.91[23.0]

FFSEE ABOVE

[3 mm SQ. x 20 mm]1/8 SQ. x 1.125

[4 mm SQ. x 25 mm]3/16 SQ. x 1.250

[5 mm SQ. x 32 mm]3/16 SQ. x 1.500

[5 mm SQ. x 35 mm]3/16 SQ. x 1.750

[6 mm SQ. x 45 mm]

W KEY

225° OR 270°

225° OR 270°

225° OR 270°

225° OR 270°

225° OR 270°

NOMINAL ROTATION

1/8[1/8]1/8

[1/8]1/8

[1/8]1/8

[1/8]1/4

[1/4]

X NPT [BSP]


3B



ENGINEERING DATA: SERIES RA ROTARY ACTUATORS

RA SPECIFICATIONS

GEAR RACKS PISTON DIAMETER PISTON AREA DISPLACEMENT

32.7765.55114.71229.42442.45

mm3/DEG. ROT.in3/DEG. ROT..002.004.007.014.027

BORESIZE


mm2

314.19490.32804.191256.641963.48

in2

.49

.761.251.953.04

mm2025324050

in.79.98

1.261.571.97

22222

225°-270°45°-180°11111

PRESSURE AND BREAKAWAY RATINGSAll Series RA Rotary Actuators have a maximum pressure

rating of 150 psi [10 bar] with a 5 psi [0.3 bar] breakaway pressure.They are for pneumatic application only.

OPERATING TEMPERATURESStandard Series RA Rotary Actuators are recommended for use

in temperatures from -20° to +180°F [-28° to +82°C]. Consult PHDfor temperatures beyond this range.

LUBRICATIONAll units are permanently lubricated at assembly for service

using non-lubricated air. Life can be extended by periodic lubricationof the rack and pinion using high grade bearing grease and by usinglubricated air.

BACKLASHAll units have 0 degrees of backlash at ends of rotation.

ANGLE OF ROTATIONStandard angles of rotation are 45°, 90°, 135°, 180°, 225°, and

270°. Consult PHD for other rotation requirements. All units havebuilt-in angle adjustments providing +10°, -45°.

ROTATIONAL TOLERANCEThe total rotational tolerance of the Series RA Rotary Actuator

is +10°, -0° on the nominal specified rotation.

ROTATIONAL RATESThe average speed of rotation for units with no load is 180°

in .05 second for 20 mm, 25 mm, and 32 mm bore units, 180° in.06 second for 40 mm bore units, and 180° in .075 second for50 mm bore units.

CONTROLSControl of pinion shaft speed is extremely important as inertia

force is a function of rotational speed and distance from load tooutput shaft center. PHD's built-in flow controls, cushions, andshock absorbers should be considered when inertial loads areapplied. See pages 3B-8 through 3B-10 for information on SeriesRA Rotary Actuator controls. See pages 3B-12 through 3B-13 forinformation on load stopping capacity.

THEORETICAL TORQUE OUTPUTBORE SIZE

20 mmINPUT

PRESSUREpsi405060708090100120130140150

25 mm 32 mm 40 mm 50 mmNm6.88.6101213151720222425

in-lb607691

106121136152182197213228

Nm3.54.45.26.17.07.98.810111213

3138465462707793

101109116

Nm1.82.32.83.23.74.24.65.66.16.57.0

in-lb1620242933374149545862

Nm.851.01.21.51.71.92.12.52.73.03.2

in-lb7.69.5111315171922242628

Nm.44.55.65.77.88.991.11.31.41.51.6

in-lb3.94.95.86.87.88.89.711121314

bar2.73.44.14.85.56.26.88.28.99.610

in-lb

1.341.611.942.562.90

34.040.949.365.073.6

376453640746966

97118182237325

43152480910541445

16722015284633184296


BEARING LOADS TABLEDISTANCEBETWEENBEARINGS

RADIALBEARING LOAD

CAPACITY

AXIALBEARING LOAD

CAPACITYBORESIZE in mmNlbNlb

3B



ENGINEERING DATA: SERIES RA ROTARY ACTUATORS

225° OR 270°lb2.32.43.63.96.57.111.813.017.719.0

kg1.021.091.601.752.943.195.315.898.018.59

TYPE OFUNIT

STANDARDWITH SHOCK OPTION -NB





ROTARY ACTUATOR WEIGHT TABLE

NOMINAL ROTATIONBORESIZE

20 mm

25 mm

32 mm

40 mm

50 mm

135° OR 180°lb1.82.12.83.34.95.88.810.712.815.7

kg.77.891.241.462.192.633.964.845.787.09

45° OR 90°lb1.82.02.42.94.35.27.79.511.614.3

kg.77.881.081.291.922.333.474.305.226.47

CUSHION AND OUTPUT HUB WEIGHTS

BORESIZE


ADDER WITHCUSHION OPTION -DB

kg.13.16.24.34.47

lb.3.4.6.81.1

ADDER WITHHUB OPTION -Q10 OR -Q19

lb.03.03.04.12.23

kg.01.01.02.05.11

STANDARD ANGLE ADJUSTMENTAll PHD Series RA Rotary Actuators are supplied as standard with

built-in adjustable angle stops. Together these mechanical positivestops provide an adjustment range of +10°, -45° on each nominal angleof rotation (see Table 1). (+5°, -22-1/2° from each end.)

Units with rotations of 180° or less utilize adjusting screws in thetop of the actuator which stop against a stop cam attached to the pinionshaft (see Illustration A). Units with rotations of 225° and 270° useangle adjustment screws located in the end caps which stop against theauxiliary lower rack (see Illustration B). When 225° or 270° units areordered with optional shock absorbers, the shock absorbers double asthe angle adjustment screws.

The ability to adjust over such a wide range eliminatesthe need to order special units for specific angles of rotation. The rangeof nominal rotations and the +10°, -45° adjustments provide a totalrotation range of 0° to 280° across the Series RA Rotary Actuator line.


STOP CAM

ILLUSTRATION A 0°-180° ROTATIONS


UPPER RACK OMITTED FOR CLARITY

ILLUSTRATION B181°-270° ROTATIONS

NOTE: Cushions are effective for approximately the last 40°of rotation each direction. The cushion angle will decrease by thesame amount that the nominal rotation is reduced by the angleadjustment. Consult PHD for non-standard angles of rotation ifcushions are required.

STANDARD ADJUSTMENT RANGE0° through 55°

45° through 100°90° through 145°

135° through 190°180° through 280°

ROTATION ORDERED45°90°135°180°

225° or 270°

TABLE 1

3B



PB

OPTIONS: SERIES RA ROTARY ACTUATORS

PC

PW

PORT CONTROL®

BOTH DIRECTIONS

PORT CONTROL®

COUNTERCLOCKWISE DIRECTION

PORT CONTROL®

CLOCKWISE DIRECTION

RASx40 & RASx50

AA

F

G

PORT CONTROLCLOCKWISE

F

G

RASx20, RASx25, RASx32

PORT CONTROLCLOCKWISE

AA

PORT CONTROLCOUNTERCLOCKWISE


PHD Port Control® is a built-in flow control valve for controllingthe speed through complete shaft rotation. The Port Control® isbased on the “meter-out” principle and features an adjustable needlein a cartridge with an external check seal. The self-locking needlehas micrometer threads and is adjustable under pressure. Itdetermines the orifice size which controls the exhaust flow rate ofthe actuator. The check seal expands while air is exhausting fromthe actuator, forcing the air to exhaust past the adjustable needle.The check seal collapses to allow a free flow of incoming air. ThePHD Port Control® saves space and eliminates the cost of fittingsand installation for external flow control valves.

NOTE: Port Control may not be effective below operatingpressures of 10 psi [.7 bar].

DB CUSHION BOTH DIRECTIONS

DC CUSHIONCOUNTERCLOCKWISE DIRECTION

CUSHIONCLOCKWISE DIRECTION

PHD Cushions allow for smooth deceleration at the end ofrotation. When the cushion operates, the remaining volume of air inthe actuator must exhaust past an adjustable needle, which controlsthe deceleration of the pinion shaft. The effective length of thecushion is approximately 40° of rotation at the end of full nominalrotation. The use of angle adjustment screws to reduce the angle ofrotation has a direct effect on the length of cushion engagement.Example: 5° of angle reduction on one end will reduce cushionengagement by 5° on that end of rotation. See pages 3B-12 through3B-13 for information on unit stopping capacity with adjustablecushions.

AA


CUSHIONCLOCKWISEF

G

BORE SIZE20 mm25 mm32 mm40 mm50 mm

F.315 [8.0].315 [8.0].315 [8.0]

.394 [10.0]

.394 [10.0]

G1.280 [32.5]1.280 [32.5]1.280 [32.5]1.378 [35.0]1.378 [35.0]

AA.118 [3.0].118 [3.0].118 [3.0]

——



F.394 [10.0].394 [10.0].394 [10.0].472 [12.0].472 [12.0]

G.768 [19.5].768 [19.5].768 [19.5].945 [24.0].945 [24.0]

AA.374 [9.5].374 [9.5].374 [9.5].965 [24.5]1.083 [27.5]


DW


3B



OPTIONS: SERIES RA ROTARY ACTUATORSPORT CONTROL® AND CUSHION LOCATIONS


F.335 [8.5].335 [8.5].335 [8.5].394 [10.0].453 [11.5]

G1.280 [32.5]1.280 [32.5]1.280 [32.5]1.378 [35.0]1.378 [35.0]

AA.374 [9.5].374 [9.5].374 [9.5].453 [11.5]1.083 [27.5]


EThis option equips the rotary actuator with magnets on the rack

for use with PHD Series 5360 Miniature Hall Effect Switches. Theseswitches mount easily to the actuator using the “T” slot in the top ofthe body.

MAGNETS FOR PHD MINIATUREHALL EFFECT SWITCHES

PART NO.53603-1-0253604-1-0253623-153624-1

COLORYellowRedYellowRed

DESCRIPTIONNPN (Sink) 4.5-24 VDC, 2 meter cablePNP (Source) 4.5-24 VDC, 2 meter cableNPN (Sink) 4.5-24 VDC, Quick ConnectPNP (Source) 4.5-24 VDC, Quick Connect

M MAGNETS FOR PHD MINIATUREREED SWITCHES

This option equips the rotary actuator with magnets on the rackfor use with PHD Series 5360 Miniature Reed Switches. Theseswitches mount easily to the actuator using the “T” slot in the top ofthe body.

PART NO.53602-2-0253609-2-02

53622-253629-2

COLORWhiteGreen

WhiteGreen

DESCRIPTIONSink or Source Type 4.5-24 VDC, 2 meter cableAC Type 110-120 VAC with Current Limit,2 meter cableSink or Source Type VDC, Quick ConnectAC Type 110-120 VAC, Quick Connectwith Current Limit

PHD Series 5360 Miniature Hall Effect and Reed Switchesare designed specifically to provide an input signal to various typesof programmable controllers or logic systems. See Switches andSensors section for information on the Series 5360 MiniatureSwitches.

NOTE: When mounting miniature switches on the 20 mm and 25mm bore units with rotations up to 180°, see the drawing above.Minimum rotation on a 20 mm bore unit with two switches is 45°.


.317 [8.0]

SWITCHES MUST BEORIENTED AS SHOWNFOR PROPER SENSING

FLATS OF STROKEADJUSTMENT NUTS MUSTBE ORIENTED AS SHOWN

IThis option equips the rotary actuator with magnets on the rack

for use with PHD Magnetoresistive Switches. These switches mounteasily to the actuator using the “T” slot in the top of the body.

MAGNETS FOR PHD MINIATUREMAGNETORESISTIVE SWITCHES

PART NO.53605-1-0253606-1-0253625-153626-1

COLORBlackOrangeBlackOrange

DESCRIPTIONNPN 6-24 VDC, 2 m cablePNP 6-24 VDC, 2 m cableNPN 6-24 VDC, Quick ConnectPNP 6-24 VDC, Quick Connect

F

G


RASx50

AA

F

GCUSHIONCLOCKWISE


AA

CUSHIONCLOCKWISE


PORTCONTROLCLOCKWISE

RASx20, RASx25, RASx32, RASx40

CUSHIONCOUNTERCLOCKWISE PORT CONTROL

CLOCKWISE

3B




NB SHOCK ABSORBER INSTALLEDBOTH DIRECTIONS

NC SHOCK ABSORBER INSTALLEDCOUNTERCLOCKWISE DIRECTION

NW SHOCK ABSORBER INSTALLEDCLOCKWISE DIRECTION

The hydraulic shock absorber options are designed for themaximum in deceleration control and rotational stopping ability. The-NB, -NC, and -NW options provide the rotary actuator with thehydraulic shock absorber installed in the appropriate location(s).See pages 3B-12 through 3B-13 for details on unit stopping capacitywith built-in shock absorbers. Shock absorbers are nominallyeffective for 45° of rotation each direction.

NOTE: The shock absorber doubles as the rotation adjustmenton units with rotations greater than 180°.


BORESIZE2025324050

PHDSHOCK

ABSORBERNUMBER56722-0156722-02*56722-0356722-04*56722-05*

THREADTYPE

M12 x 1M14 x 1.5M20 x 1.5M25 x 1.5M25 x 1.5

SHOCKABSORBER

WEIGHTlb.09.12.34.67.67

kg.04

.054.15.3.3

in-lb1.13.15.0

15.029.5

Nm.12.35.57

1.703.33

KINETICENERGY

LOADSTROKEin.15.25.25.5.5

mm3.816.356.3512.712.7

in1.242.232.413.383.44

mm31.556.661.285.787.4

AMAX.

in—.44.71.88.88

mm—

11.118

22.322.3

B ACROSSFLATS

*These shock absorbers have an adjustment feature. (See startup procedure)

PHD,In c.

SHOCK ABSORBER(CLOCKWISE)

SHOCK LOCK NUT

SHOCK ABSORBER(COUNTERCLOCKWISE)

CAP

PHD,Inc.

SHOCK ABSORBERREADY CAPSSHOCK ABSORBER

MOUNTING HOLE (CLOCKWISE)

SHOCK ABSORBERMOUNTING HOLE(COUNTERCLOCKWISE)

B ACROSSFLATS

A MAX

GS SHOCK ABSORBER READYBOTH DIRECTIONS

GT SHOCK ABSORBER READYCOUNTERCLOCKWISE DIRECTION

GU SHOCK ABSORBER READYCLOCKWISE DIRECTION

The -GS, -GT, and -GU options should only be used if theshock absorber(s) is to be supplied separately from the rotaryactuator. These options provide a unit that has provisions forinstalling hydraulic shock absorbers but have no shock absorbersincluded. See pages 3B-12 through 3B-13 for details on unitstopping capacity with built-in shock absorbers.

NOTE: The shock absorber doubles as the rotation adjustmenton units with rotations greater than 180°. Shock absorbers must beinstalled in the rotary actuator prior to operating the unit. Operationof units with shock absorber ready options without installed shockscan damage the units and void any and all warranties. Only shock

absorbers specified by PHD should be used in Series RA RotaryActuators. The use of any other shock absorbers will affect actuatorperformance and life expectancy.


0

3B




Q10 OUTPUT HUB

This option provides an output hub in place of the conventionalpinion shaft. The hub includes four thru holes counterbored fromone surface and threaded from the other, allowing easy mounting offixturing, tooling, or other actuators requiring a flat surface area.The hub is manufactured from alloy aluminum and comesassembled to a specially designed low profile pinion shaft. The hubcan be removed to allow custom machining for specific mountingneeds. The hub hole pattern can be oriented in 22.5° increments.Separate hubs are available in a kit complete with all hardware. Seechart bottom right.

Q19 OUTPUT HUB WITH HOLLOWPINION SHAFT

This option provides an output hub with a hollow pinion shaftin place of the standard pinion shaft. The hub has four thru holescounterbored from one surface and threaded from the other,allowing easy mounting of fixturing, tooling, or other actuatorsrequiring a flat surface area. The pinion shaft is hollow for feedingpneumatic or electrical lines from the back of the rotary actuator tothe output hub. The hub is manufactured from alloy aluminum andcomes assembled to a specially designed low profile pinion shaft.The hub can be removed to allow custom machining for specificmounting needs. It can also be rotated in 22.5° rotations. Kineticenergy ratings are reduced by 10% for this option.

NOTE: Available on 32 mm, 40 mm, and 50 mm units.

A1.535[39.0]1.772[45.0]2.165[55.0]2.717[69.0]2.953[75.0]

B.374[9.5].374[9.5].492

[12.5].492

[12.5].748

[19.0]

C.100[2.5].100[2.5].100[2.5].100[2.5].100[2.5]

D.787

[20.0].945

[24.0]1.102[28.0]1.398[35.5]1.575[40.0]

E.787

[20.0].945

[24.0]1.102[28.0]1.398[35.5]1.575[40.0]

F8-32

[M4 x 0.7]10-32

[M5 x 0.8]1/4-28

[M6 x 1.0]1/4-28

[M8 x 1.25]7/16-20

[M10 x 1.5]

G#4

[M3]#6

[M4]#10[M4]#10[M6]3/8

[M8]

BORE SIZE

20 mm

25 mm

32 mm

40 mm

50 mm


H—

—

.276[7.0].315[8.0].394

[10.0]

J.1264 x .25 DP[3.21 x 6.4 DP].1264 x .25 DP[3.21 x 6.4 DP].2514 x .50 DP

[6.39 x 12.7 DP].2514 x .50 DP

[6.39 x 12.7 DP].2514 x .50 DP

[6.39 x 12.7 DP]

-Q10 & -Q19 HUB INERTIA TABLEBORESIZE


in-lb-sec2

.000043831

.000085146

.000225389

.000731212

.001230561

Rotational mass moment of inertia is based on hub plusmounting screw.

HUB WEIGHTlb.06.08.14.30.42

kg.03.04.06.14.19

kg-m2

4.96 x 10-6

9.63 x 10-6

2.55 x 10-5

8.27 x 10-5

1.39 x 10-4

Jm TOTAL

HUB REPLACEMENT KITSBORESIZE


FINISHED HUB KITIMPERIAL

57651-2721-157652-2731-157653-2741-157654-2751-157655-2761-1

METRIC57658-2771-157659-2781-157660-2791-157661-2801-157662-2811-1


C

B

PHD,In c.

HUBCLAMPSCREW

HUB

Ø A

D

E

F THREAD THRU C'BOREFROM OPPOSITE SIDE FOR G SHCS

Ø H THRU UNIT(–Q19 OPTION ONLY)

Ø J DOWEL PIN HOLE(–Q10 OPTION ONLY)

3B



ROTARY ACTUATOR SELECTION: SERIES RA

KINETIC ENERGY TABLE

BORESIZE


KE MAX. WITHSHOCK ABSORBER

KE MAX.WITH CUSHION

KE MAX.PLAIN UNIT

.1243

.3503

.80231.6953.334

Nm1.103.107.1015.029.5

in-lb.0848.1921.4068.7628.9955

Nm.751.703.606.758.81

in-lb.0237.0519.1085.1966.2407

Nm.21.46.96

1.742.13

in-lb

To select the appropriate RA rotary actuator, it is crucial to considerseveral factors including bearing capacity, torque requirements andstopping capacity of the actuator. The bearing capacities are listedon page 3B-6. To determine the required torque to rotate the load ina given time, the rotational mass moments of inertia, gravity, timeand acceleration must be taken into account. To stop an actuator, allof the same required information for torque is needed plus kineticenergy. Follow the steps below to select the appropriate RAactuator.

1) Review pages 3B-6 to make sure RA rotary actuator bearingscan withstand axial and radial bearing loads.

2) Determine the torque requirements of the actuator.

a) Determine Mass Moment of Inertia.Select the illustration from the application types on thefollowing page that most resembles your specificapplication. Several separate calculations may benecessary to fully describe your application. Using theappropriate application equation, calculate the massmoment of inertia for each type of illustration. The totalmass moment of inertia will be the sum of the individualcalculations.

b) Determine the necessary acceleration.

c) Calculate the required torque.Select the illustration from the application types on thefollowing page that most resembles your specificapplication. Several separate calculations may benecessary to fully describe your application. Using theappropriate application equation, calculate the massmoment of inertia for each type of illustration. The totaltorque will be the sum of the individual calculations.Note: Torque calculations are theoretical, an appropriatesafety factor should be considered. PHD recommends aminimum safety factor of 2 to account for friction loss,airline and valve size, and attached accessories.

Acceleration (α) =

.0175 x Degrees of RotationTime of Rotation in seconds

ROTATIONAL VELOCITY EQUATIONS

KINETIC ENERGY BASIC EQUATIONKE = 1/2 Jm ω2 (Fa)

Average Velocity (rad/sec)Uniformly accelerated from rest

ω = =radsec

EQUATION A

3) Determine the stopping capacity of the actuator by using theequation given below.

a) Determine the average rotational velocity by usingequation A.

2 x (Rotation angle in radians)

(Time of Rotation in Seconds)2

.035 x (Rotation angle in degrees)

(Time of Rotation in Seconds)2Acceleration (α) =

APPLICATIONFACTORS (Fa)

UNITDESCRIPTION

plain unitwith cushionwith shocks

44

1.35

b) Using Jm from step 2a and velocity from step 3a,calculate the kinetic energy of the application.

c) Select an appropriate Fa factor from the table below.

d) Use the KE Energy Table below to select appropriateRL actuator.

3B



Jm = x k2Fg

g


Jm = x12

Fg

ga2 + 3k2

( ) ( )Fg1

gJm = x (4a2 + 3k2)

12+ xFg2

g(4b2 + 3k2)

12

b-a2


( )k2Jm = +L2

3Fg

gxx 1

4


Tg = [(Jm x α) + [(Fg2 - Fg1) x (a + ( ))]] x SF

kFg

k

c Fg2

a

Fg1b

a

L

kk








Jm = x 4a2 + c2

12+ x 4b2 + c2

12Fg1

gFg2

g

Jm = x x k225

Fg

g

Point Load

aFg1

Fg2

b

LOAD ORIENTATION



UNBALANCED LOADS

T = Jm x α x SF

UNBALANCED LOADS

Jm = x k2

2Fg

g

a2 + b2

12Jm = xFg

g

a

b

ROTARY ACTUATOR SELECTION: SERIES RAIMPERIAL UNITS:Jm = Rotational Mass Moment of Inertia (in-lb-sec2) (Dependent on physical size of object and weight)g = Gravitational Constant = 386.4 in/sec2 Fg = Weight of Load (lb) k = Radius of Gyration (in)T = Torque required to rotate load (in-lbs) α = Acceleration (rad/sec2) t = time (sec)SF = Safety Factor



3B



ω = .0175 x = 31.5 rad/sec180°.1 sec


APPLICATION EXAMPLE: SERIES RA ROTARY ACTUATORSEXAMPLE A-Disk rotating about centerline of unit.

xJm =Fg k2

g 2 Jm =

x

xFg k2

g 2

1.05 N (.0222m) 2

9.81 2xJm =

.236 lb (.875 in) 2

386.4 2

α = .035 x rotational angle (deg)[rotational time (sec)]2

α = .035 x = 630 rad/sec2180°(.1 sec)2

Jm =

T = Jm x α x 2

T = 2.64 x 10-5 x 630 x 2 = .03 N-m

k1.00

[25.4]

1.75[44.45]

k



IMPERIAL METRICKE = 1/2 x Jm x ω 2 x Fa KE = 1/2 x Jm x ω 2 x Fa

KE = .5 x .000234 x 31.52 x 4 KE = .5 x 2.64 x 10-5 x 31.52 x 4KE = .464 in-lbs KE = .052 N-m


KE = 1/2 x Jm x ω2 x Fa KE = 1/2 x Jm x ω2 x FaKE = .5 x .000234 x 31.52 x 1.35 KE = .5 x 2.64 x 10-5 x 31.52 x 1.35

KE = .157 in-lbs KE = .018 N-m

When the recommended shocks are used, three times the KE canbe handled, or conversely, a smaller unit can be used.

c) Use the KE Energy table on page 3B-12 to select theappropriate RL actuator. The following units satisfy therequirements. 32 mm plain, 32 mm with shock pad,or 25 mm with cushions.


IMPERIAL METRICROTATION ANGLE / TIME 180°/.10 sec 180°/.10 secLOAD Aluminum Disk Aluminum DiskWEIGHT .236 lb 1.05 NMASS .107 KgPRESSURE 87 psi 6 barSAFETY FACTOR 2 2


a) Calculate Rotational Mass Moment of Inertia (Jm) usingequations given on page 3B-13.

IMPERIAL METRIC

Jm = .000234 in-lb-sec2 Jm = 2.64 x 10-5 N-m-sec2



IMPERIAL METRICT = Jm x α x SF

T = .000234 x 630 x 2 = .29 in-lbs

Review torque chart on page 3B-6 for 87 psi [6 bar] to selectminimum actuator based on torque.


a) Determine the average rotational velocity using Equation Aon page 3B-12.

ω = rad/sec = .0175 x

3B




IMPERIAL METRICROTATION ANGLE / TIME 180°/.5 sec 180°/.5 secRECTANGULAR PLATE Steel Plate Steel PlateWEIGHT 1.698 lb 7.55 NMASS .77 KgPOINT LOAD 1 lb 4.45 N

(2" off center) (50.8 mm off center)PRESSURE 87 psi 6 barSAFETY FACTOR 2 2


a) Calculate Rotational Mass Moment of Inertia (Jm) usingequations given on page 3B-13.





Total Jm Total Jm = .0146+.0104=.025 in-lb-sec2 = .00165+.00117=.00282N-m-sec2




T = [(Jm x α)+(Fg x k)] x 2

T = [(.0140 x 25.2) + (1 x 2)] x 2

T = 4.5 in-lbs

Jm = x7.55 (.1524)2+(.0508)2

9.81 12

Jm = x

x (.0508 m)2

EXAMPLE B-Combination of rectangular plate mounted oncenter and a point load mounted off center.

4.45 N9.81

Jm =

Fg

g x k2Jm =

Jm = x

1 lb386.4

Fg

g x k2Jm =

x (2 in)2Jm =

1.698 62+22

386.4 12

Fg a2+b2

g 12

Jm = x

α = .035 x rotational angle (deg)[time (sec)]2

α = .035 x = 25.2 rad/sec2180°(.5 sec)2

APPLICATION EXAMPLE: SERIES RA ROTARY ACTUATORS

Fg a2+b2

g 12

2"[50.8]

(k)

1lb[4.45 N]

2"[50.8]

(b)

6" [152.4] (a)


T = [(Jm x α)+(Fg x k)] x SF

T = [(.00117 x 25.2) + (4.45 x .0508)] x 2

T = .51 N-m


180°.5 sec

T = Jm x α x SF

T = .00166 x 25.2 x 2 = .084 N-m

Total T = .51 + .084 = .594 N-m


T = Jm x α x SF

T = .0146 x 25.2 x 2 = .74 in-lbs

Total T = 4.5 + .74 = 5.24 in-lbs

Review torque chart on page 3B-6 for 87 psi [6 bar] to selectminimum actuator based on torque.


a) Determine the average rotational velocity using Equation Aon page 3B-12.

ω = .0175 x ω = .0175 x = 6.3 rad/sec


IMPERIAL METRICKE = 1/2 x Jm x ω 2 x Fa KE = 1/2 x Jm x ω 2 x FaKE = .5 x .025 x 6.32 x 4 KE = .5 x .00282 x 6.32 x 4

KE = 1.98 in-lbs KE = .224 N-m


KE = 1/2 x Jm x ω 2 x Fa KE = 1/2 x Jm x ω 2 x FaKE = .5 x .025 x 6.32 x 1.35 KE = .5 x .00282 x 6.32 x 1.35

KE = .66 in-lbs KE = .076 N-m

When the recommended shocks are used, three times the KE canbe handled, or conversly, a smaller rotary unit can be used.

c) Use the KE Energy table on page 3B-12 to select theappropriate RA actuator. The following units satisfy therequirements: 50 mm plain, 32 mm with cushions, or 20 withshock absorbers.

3B



NOTES

3C

3C-1SOLUTIONS FORINDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION CAT-03

ROTARY ACTUATORSMINIATURE, AIR/OIL TANDEM, AND MULTI-POSITION

INDEX:Miniature(0180 & 0183 Series)

Pages 3C-2 to 3C-6

Series 1000-8000Pages 3C-8 to 3C-12

Air/Oil TandemPages 3C-13 to 3C-19

Multi-PositionPages 3C-20 to 3C-28

Engineering DataPages 3C-29 to 3C-31

Plumbing SchematicsPages 3C-32 to 3C-33

Start-up ProcedurePage 3C-34

OptionsPages 3C-35 to 3C-40

Specialty Actuators Provide Solutions toUnique Rotary Motion Requirements

MINIATUREROTARY

ACTUATORS

SERIES 2000-8000AIR/OIL TANDEM

SERIES 2000-8000MULTI-POSITION

SERIES 1000-8000

(800) 624-8511www.phdinc.com/products/rotaryactuators

3C

3C-2SOLUTIONS FORINDUSTRIAL AUTOMATIONCAT-03

TO ORDER SPECIFY:Series, Size, Type, Design No.,Options, and Seals.

1

TYPE1 - Single Rack2 - Double RackT - TandemNOTE: 018x50,018375, and 018875are available in -2double rack only.

- - 0 1

OPTIONS0 - No Sensor3 - Sensor Transducer with Transition Plate

175MODEL NUMBER

SIZE50 - 1/2" [12 mm] Bore75 - 3/4" [19 mm] Bore

DESIGN NO.1 - 018x753 - 018x50

SEALS1 - Buna-N (standard)2 - Fluoro-Elastomer

SERIES NUMBER FOR PORT & MTG. HOLE TYPEIMPERIAL METRIC POSITION

0 5 2 Position Actuator3 8 3 Position Actuator -(Not

available on Size 50)

NOTES:1) Sensor must be used with a PHD Set Point

Module. See Switches and Sensors sectionfor information and ordering data.

0018

UNITS WITH IMPERIAL SHAFTS AND KEYWAYS

1

TYPE1 - Single Rack2 - Double RackT - TandemNOTE: 018x50, and018975 are availablein -2 double rack only.

- - 0 1

OPTIONS0 - No Sensor3 - Sensor Transducer with Transition Plate

175MODEL NUMBER

SIZE50 - 1/2" [12 mm] Bore75 - 3/4" [19 mm] Bore

DESIGN NO.1 - 018x75x3 - 0186502

SEALS1 - Buna-N (standard)2 - Fluoro-Elastomer

NOTES:1) Sensor must be used with a PHD Set Point

Module. See Switches and Sensors sectionfor information and ordering data.

6018

UNITS WITH METRIC SHAFTS AND KEYWAYS

SERIES NUMBER FOR PORT & MTG. HOLE TYPEIMPERIAL METRIC POSITION

— 6 2 Position Actuator— 9 3 Position Actuator -(Not

available on Size 50)

TO ORDER SPECIFY:Series, Size, Type, Design No.,Options, and Seals.

ORDERING DATA: MINIATURE ROTARY ACTUATORS

(800) 624-8511www.phdinc.com/018x

3C


SERIESSPECIFICATIONS 018x50 018x75PISTON SEALS (1 Per Piston) Block Vee (2 Per Piston) Block VeePISTONS Part of the Rack Free Floating AluminumPINION SHAFT One Piece Alloy SteelRACK Alloy SteelEND CAPS — Zinc Plated SteelBODY Hardcoated AluminumBEARINGS (2) Steel Ball BearingsPORTS 10-32 [M5 x .8] with Barb Fittings 1/8 NPT [1/8 BSP]LUBRICATION Permanently Lubricated for Non-Lube AirANGLE ADJUSTMENT 0° to 180° (Fully Adjustable)BACKLASH 0° at Both End PositionsROTATION 180° TotalFLOW CONTROLS Not Available Built-in Standard*

THEORETICAL TORQUE in-lb/psi [Nm/bar]MODEL

0180502 0180751 0180752 018075T 0183752.065 [.09] .11 [.18] .22 [.36] .11 [.18] .11 [.18]

OUTPUT TORQUES TO 33 in-lb [3.7 Nm]

*Not available on 018375, 018875, or 018975 3 position units.

MINIATURE ROTARY ACTUATORS:SERIES 018x502 & 018x75xBENEFITS

■ PHD Miniature Rotary Actuators provide an infinite choice ofrotation between 0 and 180° in a very small package which isideal for small part orientation and turnover.

■ Two bore sizes, single and double rack, air-oil tandem, and 3position models are offered for a wide range of applicationrequirements.

■ Standard external angle adjustments provide easy adjustmentof rotation between 0 and 180°.

■ Zero backlash at ends of rotation provide precise positioning ofattached load.

■ One piece pinion gear with sealed ball bearings give maximumoutput shaft support, low friction, and long unit life.

■ Built-in flow controls are standard on most models for precisecontrol of rotation speed.

■ Optional Hall Effect Sensor/Set Point Module is available forsensing multiple position throughout rotation.

UNIT 018x752

(800) 624-8511www.phdinc.com/018x

3C


DIMENSIONS: SERIES 018x75x MINIATURE ROTARY ACTUATORS.5

00[1

2.7]

2.37

5 [6

0.5]

4.75

0 [1

21]

ANG

LE L

IMIT

ING

SEG

MEN

TAU

XILI

ARY

MTG

LO

CATI

ON

LIM

ITS

RO

TATI

ON

TO

45°

FR

OM

MID

POIN

T O

F R

OTA

TIO

N

1.50

0[3

8.1]

.250

[6.3

]

SHAF

T ST

OP

PIN

ANG

LE L

IMIT

ING

SEG

MEN

TS A

LLO

W18

0° M

AX R

OTA

TIO

N0°

MIN

RO

TATI

ON

2X R

EF C

AP A

REA

1.50

0[3

8.1]

10-2

4 [M

8 x

.5]

THR

EAD

x .3

75 [1

0] D

P4X

TO

P &

BO

TTO

M

2.00

0 [5

0.8]

.875

[22.

2]

10-3

2 TH

REA

D x

.312

[M5

x .8

] DP

2.50

0 [6

3.4]

10-2

4 [M

5 x

.8]

THR

EAD

x .2

50 [6

.3] D

P4X

FR

ON

T &

BAC

K

2.00

0[5

0.8]

1.00

0[2

5.4]

BASI

C D

IMEN

SIO

NS

SER

IES

018x

75x

& 0

18x7

52 U

NIT

S

4.25

0 [1

07.9

]

.310

[7.9

]1.

000

[25.

4] S

Q

.810

[20.

6]2.

125

[53.

97]

.500

[12.

7]

4.25

0 [1

07.6

]2X

1/8

NPT

[1/8

BSP

]

.190

[4.8

]1.

500

[38.

1].810

[20.

6]2.

125

[53.

8]

SIN

GLE

RAC

K U

NIT

SER

IES

018x

751

DO

UBL

E R

ACK

UN

ITSE

RIE

S 01

8x75

2

AIR

/OIL

TAN

DEM

UN

ITSE

RIE

S 01

8x75

T

.500

[12.

7]

2.00

0 [5

0.8]

2X 1

/8 N

PT[1

/8 B

SP]

2X 1

/8 N

PT[1

/8 B

SP]

.375

[9.5

3]

NO

TES:

1) A

LL D

ETAI

LS S

HO

W U

NIT

S AT

MID

-RO

TATI

ON

2) N

UM

BER

S IN

[ ] A

RE

FOR

MET

RIC

UN

ITS

AND

AR

E IN

mm

.

FOR

SH

AFT

DET

AILS

SEE

PAG

E 3C

-5

2.12

5 [5

3.9]

.310

[7.9

]

1.00

0[2

5.4]

.810

[20.

6]

2.12

5[5

3.9]

CHEC

K VA

LVE

FITT

ING

2.00

0[5

0.8]

.500

[12.

7]

1.00

0[2

5.4]

.188

[4.8

]

2X T

HR

U H

OLE

FO

R #

8 [M

4] S

CREW

RES

ERVO

IR A

SSEM

BLY

ISIN

CLU

DED

WIT

H U

NIT

AN

DSH

IPPE

D W

ITH

3 F

EET

[1 m

] OF

FLEX

IBLE

TU

BIN

G3.

62[9

2]

.937

[23.

8]

.687

[17.

4].7

50[1

9]

1.00

0[2

5.4]

1.00

0[2

5.4]

1.00

0[2

5.4]

1

3

42

1

3

42

42

All dimensions are reference only unless specifically toleranced.(800) 624-8511

www.phdinc.com/018x

3C


DIMENSIONS: SERIES 018x752 3 POSITION MINIATURE


.750

[19]

.500

[12.

7]

2.37

5 [6

0.3]

5.00

0 [1

27]

2.50

0 [6

3.5]

MAX

.906

[23]

DIA

TYP

2.12

5 [5

3.8]4.

250

[107

.06]

2X A

DJUS

TMEN

T CO

NTRO

L KN

OBFO

R LO

CATI

ON O

F TH

IRD

POSI

TION

ANGL

E AD

JUST

MEN

TS.3

10[7

.9]

1.00

0[2

5.4]

1.57

7 [4

0]

MUL

TI-P

OSIT

ION

UNIT

SERI

ES 0

18x7

52

1.00

0[2

5.4]

NOTE

S:1)

ALL

DET

AILS

SHO

W U

NITS

AT

MID

-ROT

ATIO

N2)

NUM

BERS

IN [

] ARE

FOR

MET

RIC

UNIT

S AN

D AR

E IN

mm

.

1 3

42

42

CB1

AB2

III

I

POR

TS P

RES

SUR

IZED

B 1 &

B2

II

PORT

PRE

SSUR

IZED

- A

FULL

CCW

POS

ITIO

NPO

RT P

RESS

URIZ

ED -

CFU

LL C

W P

OSIT

ION

T°

R°

I°

MIDPOINTADJUSTMENTSTOPS

LOCKING SCREWSHOLD MIDPOINTADJUSTMENT IN PLACE

VIEW FROM FRONT OF UNIT

B1C

B2A

IIII

II

OPERATING PRINCIPLEThe PHD Three Position Rotary Actuator yields three output

shaft positions. Both the extreme positions and the midposition canbe adjusted in the field allowing a total rotation from 0° to 180° withthe midpoint anywhere between. Pressurizing port C provides fullcounterclockwise rotation (position I). Pressurizing ports B1 and B2

at the same time causes the unit to rotate to position II and to holdat that position. The racks are trapped by the piston and rods (B1

and B2) and hold the pinion from rotating, creating the positivemidposition. The midpoint adjustment stops allow the midpoint tobe set by changing the lengths that each piston and rod can stroke.Position III is obtained by pressurizing port A driving the pinionshaft to a full clockwise position.

Output positions can be selected in any sequence allowing theactuator to stop at or pass by the midposition.

SHAFT DETAIL FOR 018x75x

SERIES018075x018375x018575x018875x018675x018975x

ADIMENSION

B C+ .000- .001.375

+ .000- .0259.53

.375

[9.53]

+ .0000- .0003.3939

+ .000- .00710

—

204WoodruffKeyway

3 mm SQx 16 mm LG

B

A Ø

C KEYWAY

IMPERIAL SHAFTS

A Ø

C KEYWAY

METRIC SHAFTS

(800) 624-8511www.phdinc.com/018x

3C


DIMENSIONS: SERIES 018x502 MINIATURE ROTARY ACTUATORS

.750

[19]

1.00

0[2

5.4]

NOTE

:NUM

BERS

IN [

] ARE

FOR

MET

RIC

UNIT

S AN

D AR

E IN

mm

.

SERI

ES

0180

5001

8550

0186

50

ADI

MEN

SION

BC

+ .0

00- .

001

.250

+ .0

00- .

025

6.35

.312

[7.9

2]

+ .0

000

- .00

03.2

362

+ .0

00- .

007

6.0

—

203

Woo

druf

fKe

yway

2 m

m S

Qx

14 m

m L

G

B

AØ

C KE

YWAY

IMPE

RIAL

SHA

FTS

AØ

C KE

YWAY

MET

RIC

SHAF

TS

ANGL

E LI

MIT

ING

SEGM

ENT

AUXI

LIAR

Y M

TG L

OCAT

ION.

LIM

ITS

ROTA

TION

TO

45° F

ROM

MID

POIN

T OF

ROT

ATIO

N

ANGL

E LI

MIT

ING

SEGM

ENTS

ALLO

W 1

80° M

AX R

OTAT

ION

0° M

IN R

OTAT

ION

2X 1

0-32

[M5

x .8

] POR

T -

BARB

FIT

TING

FOR

1/16

[1.6

] ID

TUBE

SUP

PLIE

D

6-32

THR

EAD

x .2

50 [M

3 x

6] D

P

8-32

THR

EAD

x .2

50 [M

4 x

6] D

P4X

TOP

& B

OTTO

M

.250

[6.3

]

SEE

DETA

ILBE

LOW

1.50

0 [3

8.1]

.594

[15]

.312

[7.9

].7

50[1

9]

8-32

THR

EAD

x .1

87 [5

][M

4 x

.7] D

P4X

FRO

NT &

BAC

K

2.00

0 [5

0.8]

1.50

0 [3

8.1]

1.50

0[3

8.1]

1.10

9[2

8.2]2.

219

[56.

4]1.

500

[38.

1]3.00

0 [7

6.2]

DOUB

LE R

ACK

UNIT

SSE

RIES

018

0502

SHAF

T KE

YWAY

: SHO

WN

AT M

ID-R

OTAT

ION

- WOO

DRUF

F KE

Y IS

SUP

PLIE

D W

ITH

ALL

ACTU

ATOR

SRO

TATI

ON: 1

80° M

AXIM

UMPO

RT P

OSIT

IONS

: IND

ICAT

ED B

Y CI

RCLE

D NU

MBE

RSPO

RT C

ONTR

OLS:

NOT

AVAI

LABL

E ON

SER

IES

0183

752,

018

8752

& 0

18x5

02 U

NITS

. POR

T CO

NTRO

LS A

REST

ANDA

RD O

N AL

L OT

HER

ACTU

ATOR

S.M

TG. H

OLES

: CEN

TERE

D ON

CEN

TERL

INE

OF A

CTUA

TOR

BODY

.750

[19]

1 3

42

All dimensions are reference only unless specifically toleranced.(800) 624-8511

www.phdinc.com/018x

3C


NOTES

(800) 624-8511www.phdinc.com/018x

3C


UNIT

S W

ITH

IMPE

RIAL

SHA

FTS

AND

KEYW

AY

PORT

CON

TROL

©

BUIL

T-IN

MET

ER O

UTFL

OW C

ONTR

OL V

ALVE

P-F

low

con

trol b

oth

dire

ctio

nsP1

-Flo

w c

ontro

l clo

ckw

ise

P2-F

low

con

trol c

ount

ercl

ockw

ise

R1 1

A-

P18

0-

DK-

M-V

TO O

RDER

SPE

CIFY

:Ty

pe, D

esig

n No

., Se

ries,

Ang

le o

f Rot

atio

n, a

nd O

ptio

ns.

--

A2

NOTE

S:1)

Sens

or m

ust b

e us

ed w

ith a

PHD

Set

Poi

nt M

odul

e.Se

e Sw

itche

s an

d Se

nsor

s se

ctio

n fo

r inf

orm

atio

nan

d or

derin

g da

ta.

2)M

ount

ing

flang

es m

ust b

e or

dere

d se

para

tely.

3)SA

E Po

rts a

vaila

ble.

Con

sult

PHD

for s

izes.

SERI

ES10

00 &

200

030

00 &

400

050

00 &

600

070

00 &

800

0

PROX

IMIT

Y SW

ITCH

MOU

NTIN

G BR

ACKE

TSSI

ZE N

O.-3

2-3

4-3

8-3

9Se

e Sw

itche

s an

d Se

nsor

sse

ctio

n fo

r com

plet

eor

derin

g in

form

atio

n.

ANGL

E OF

ROT

ATIO

NST

ANDA

RD A

NGLE

S45

°, 90

°, 18

0°, 2

70°,

360°

, and

450

°Fo

r oth

er a

vaila

ble

rota

tions

,co

nsul

t PHD

.

TYPE

IMPE

RIAL

MET

RIC

R11A

-Sin

gle

Shaf

t Ext

.R1

5A-S

ingl

e Sh

aft E

xt.

150

psi A

ir M

ax.

10 b

ar A

ir M

ax.

R21A

-Dou

ble

Shaf

t Ext

.R2

5A-D

oubl

e Sh

aft E

xt.

150

psi A

ir M

ax.

10 b

ar A

ir M

ax.

R11H

-Sin

gle

Shaf

t Ext

.R1

5H-S

ingl

e Sh

aft E

xt.

1500

psi

Hyd

. Max

.10

0 ba

r Hyd

. Max

.R2

1H-D

oubl

e Sh

aft E

xt.

R25H

-Dou

ble

Shaf

t Ext

.15

00 p

si H

yd. M

ax.

100

bar H

yd. M

ax.

(Cus

hion

s an

d Sh

ock

Pads

are

not a

vaila

ble

on th

e sa

me

end

ofac

tuat

or. S

hock

Pad

s ar

e no

tav

aila

ble

for H

ydra

ulic

use

.)

CUSH

ION

OR S

HOCK

PAD

D-C

ushi

ons

both

dire

ctio

nsD1

-Cus

hion

clo

ckw

ise

D2-C

ushi

on c

ount

ercl

ockw

ise

B-S

hock

Pad

s bo

th d

irect

ions

B1-S

hock

Pad

clo

ckw

ise

B2-S

hock

Pad

cou

nter

cloc

kwis

e

OPTI

ONS

C-

Cros

s Ke

y Pi

nion

Sha

ftE

-M

agne

tic P

isto

n fo

r Hal

l Effe

ct S

witc

hG

-Sh

aft S

eal b

oth

side

sH

-Ho

llow

Pin

ion

Shaf

t (no

t ava

ilabl

e on

type

R21

)I

-Po

rt Po

sitio

n 1

on to

p ra

ckPo

rt Po

sitio

n 3

on b

otto

m ra

ck(A

vaila

ble

on S

erie

s 20

00, 4

000,

600

0, a

nd 8

000

only.

)J

-Ha

ll Se

nsor

(Set

Poi

nt M

odul

e is

ord

ered

sep

arat

ely)

for r

otat

ions

not

exc

eedi

ng 1

80°

K-

Prel

oad

Keyw

ay P

inio

n Sh

aft

L-

Coun

terc

lock

wis

e Un

idire

ctio

nal C

lutc

hM

-M

agne

tic P

isto

n fo

r Ree

d Sw

itch

N-

Pilo

t Val

ve A

ctua

tor (

PVA)

O-

Ports

in P

ositi

on 1

*Q

-Po

rts in

Pos

ition

3*

R-

Cloc

kwis

e Un

idire

ctio

nal C

lutc

hS

-SA

E Po

rts (H

ydra

ulic

Uni

ts O

nly)

T-

Ports

in P

ositi

on 4

V-

Fluo

ro-E

last

omer

Sea

lsW

-Cl

ose

Tole

ranc

e Ro

tatio

n, +

30 m

inut

es, -

0Z1

-El

ectro

less

Nic

kel P

late

* Av

aila

ble

on S

erie

s 10

00, 3

000,

500

0, a

nd 7

000

only.

ANGL

E AD

JUST

MEN

TA

-Ang

le a

djus

tmen

t bot

h en

dsA1

-Ang

le a

djus

tmen

t clo

ckw

ise

30°

A2-A

ngle

adj

ustm

ent c

ount

ercl

ockw

ise

30°

(20°

for S

erie

s 80

00)

SERI

ES1

(000

) 1" B

ore

Sing

le R

ack

2 (0

00) 1

" Bor

e Do

uble

Rac

k3

(000

) 1-3

/8" B

ore

Sing

le R

ack

4 (0

00) 1

-3/8

" Bor

e Do

uble

Rac

k5

(000

) 2" B

ore

Sing

le R

ack

6 (0

00) 2

" Bor

e Do

uble

Rac

k7

(000

) 3" B

ore

Sing

le R

ack

8 (0

00) 3

" Bor

e Do

uble

Rac

k

DESI

GN N

O.1

-Im

peria

l - P

orts

and

mou

ntin

g ho

les

are

impe

rial.

5 -

Met

ric -

Ports

and

mou

ntin

g ho

les

are

met

ric.

Pini

on s

hafts

and

key

way

are

impe

rial.

ORDERING DATA: SERIES 1000-8000 ROTARY ACTUATORS

IMPERIAL

!Op

tions

may

affe

ct u

nit l

engt

h.Se

e un

it di

men

sion

and

opt

ions

page

s fo

r add

ers.

(800) 624-8511www.phdinc.com/18000r

3C


ORDERING DATA: SERIES 1000-8000 ROTARY ACTUATORS

PORT

CON

TROL

©

BUIL

T-IN

MET

ER O

UTFL

OW C

ONTR

OL V

ALVE

P-F

low

con

trol b

oth

dire

ctio

nsP1

-Flo

w c

ontro

l clo

ckw

ise

P2-F

low

con

trol c

ount

ercl

ockw

ise

R1 6

A-

P18

0-

DM

-V-

-A

2

NOTE

S:1)

Sens

or m

ust b

e us

ed w

ith a

PHD

Set

Poi

nt M

odul

e.Se

e Sw

itche

s an

d Se

nsor

s se

ctio

n fo

r inf

orm

atio

nan

d or

derin

g da

ta.

2)M

ount

ing

flang

es m

ust b

e or

dere

d se

para

tely.

SERI

ES10

00 &

200

030

00 &

400

050

00 &

600

070

00 &

800

0

PROX

IMIT

Y SW

ITCH

MOU

NTIN

G BR

ACKE

TSSI

ZE N

O.-3

2-3

4-3

8-3

9Se

e Sw

itche

s an

d Se

nsor

sse

ctio

n fo

r com

plet

eor

derin

g in

form

atio

n.

ANGL

E OF

ROT

ATIO

NST

ANDA

RD A

NGLE

S45

°, 90

°, 18

0°, 2

70°,

360°

, and

450

°Fo

r oth

er a

vaila

ble

rota

tions

,co

nsul

t PHD

.

(Cus

hion

s an

d Sh

ock

Pads

are

not a

vaila

ble

on th

e sa

me

end

ofac

tuat

or. S

hock

Pad

s ar

e no

tav

aila

ble

for H

ydra

ulic

use

.)

CUSH

ION

OR S

HOCK

PAD

D-C

ushi

ons

both

dire

ctio

nsD1

-Cus

hion

clo

ckw

ise

D2-C

ushi

on c

ount

ercl

ockw

ise

B-S

hock

Pad

s bo

th d

irect

ions

B1-S

hock

Pad

clo

ckw

ise

B2-S

hock

Pad

cou

nter

cloc

kwis

e

OPTI

ONS

E-

Mag

netic

Pis

ton

for H

all E

ffect

Sw

itch

I-

Port

Posi

tion

1 on

top

rack

Port

Posi

tion

3 on

bot

tom

rack

(Ava

ilabl

e on

Ser

ies

2000

, 400

0, 6

000,

and

800

0 on

ly.)

M-

Mag

netic

Pis

ton

for R

eed

Switc

hO

-Po

rts in

Pos

ition

1*

Q-

Ports

in P

ositi

on 3

*T

-Po

rts in

Pos

ition

4V

-Fl

uoro

-Ela

stom

er S

eals

W-

Clos

e To

lera

nce

Rota

tion,

+30

min

utes

, -0

Z1-

Elec

trole

ss N

icke

l Pla

te

* Av

aila

ble

on S

erie

s 10

00, 3

000,

500

0, a

nd 7

000

only.

ANGL

E AD

JUST

MEN

TA

-Ang

le a

djus

tmen

t bot

h en

dsA1

-Ang

le a

djus

tmen

t clo

ckw

ise

30°

A2-A

ngle

adj

ustm

ent c

ount

ercl

ockw

ise

30°

(20°

for S

erie

s 80

00)

SERI

ES1

(000

) 1" B

ore

Sing

le R

ack

2 (0

00) 1

" Bor

e Do

uble

Rac

k3

(000

) 1-3

/8" B

ore

Sing

le R

ack

4 (0

00) 1

-3/8

" Bor

e Do

uble

Rac

k5

(000

) 2" B

ore

Sing

le R

ack

6 (0

00) 2

" Bor

e Do

uble

Rac

k7

(000

) 3" B

ore

Sing

le R

ack

8 (0

00) 3

" Bor

e Do

uble

Rac

k

DESI

GN N

O.6

-M

etric

- Po

rts a

nd m

ount

ing

hole

s, p

inio

nsh

afts

and

key

way

are

met

ric.

TYPE

MET

RIC

R16A

-Si

ngle

Sha

ft Ex

t.10

bar

Air

Max

.R2

6A-

Doub

le S

haft

Ext.

10 b

ar A

ir M

ax.

R16H

-Si

ngle

Sha

ft Ex

t.10

0 ba

r Hyd

. Max

.R2

6H-

Doub

le S

haft

Ext.

100

bar H

yd. M

ax.

UNIT

S W

ITH

MET

RIC

SHAF

TS A

ND K

EYW

AYTO

ORD

ER S

PECI

FY:

Type

, Des

ign

No.,

Serie

s, A

ngle

of R

otat

ion,

and

Opt

ions

.

METRIC

!Op

tions

may

affe

ct u

nit l

engt

h.Se

e un

it di

men

sion

and

opt

ions

page

s fo

r add

ers.

(800) 624-8511www.phdinc.com/18000r

3C


ROTARY ACTUATORS: SERIES 1000-8000

TYPESPECIFICATIONS R1xA & R2xA R1xH & R2xHPISTON SEALS (3 Per Piston) Block Vee with Back-up RingPISTONS Free Floating AluminumTIERODS High Tensile SteelTUBE SEALS Square CutPINION SHAFTS One Piece Alloy SteelRACK Alloy SteelEND CAPS Zinc Plated Alloy SteelBODY Hardcoated AluminumTUBES Hardcoated Aluminum Hardcoated Aluminum on Series 1000-4000

— Honed Steel on Series 5000-8000BEARINGS (2) Steel Ball BearingsPORTS NPT [BSP]LUBRICATION Permanent for Non-Lube Air —

150 psi [10 bar] Air Max 1500 psi [100 bar] Hyd. Max.STANDARD ROTATIONS 45°, 90°, 180°, 270°, 360°, 450°OPTIONS Port Controls®, Cushions, Angle Adjustment,

Magnetic Pistons, Fluoro-Elastomer Seals

THEORETICAL TORQUE in-lb/psi [Nm/bar]SERIES

1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000.38 .77 1.1 2.2 2.3 4.7 10.6 21.2

[.63] [1.28] [1.83] [3.66] [3.82] [7.82] [17.61] [35.21]

OUTPUT TORQUES TO 31,800 in-lb [3595 Nm]

BENEFITS

■ PHD Series 1000-8000 Rotary Actuators are pneumatically orhydraulically powered providing output torques up to31,800 in-lb [3595 Nm].

■ Rugged design and construction makes these actuators idealfor heavy duty service in tough working environments.

■ Four bore sizes are available in single and double rack modelswith standard rotations from 45° to 450°.

■ Free floating pistons with rack and pinion design eliminatesbinding for low breakaway and long unit life.

■ Sealed shaft ball bearings provide long life and maximum shaftstability for heavy payloads.

■ Available with a wide range of options including built-in flowcontrols, cushions, angle adjustments, shock pads, and pinionshaft options for specifying the exact actuator for yourapplication.

■ Simple construction allows easy field repairability.

(800) 624-8511www.phdinc.com/18000r

3C


DIMENSIONS: SERIES 1000-8000 ROTARY ACTUATORS

SERI

ES10

00 &

200

030

00 &

400

050

00 &

600

070

00 &

800

0

A5.

698

7.90

69.

126

12.1

60

B.0

174

.026

.026

.052

C3.

000

4.25

05.

000

8.00

0

D2.

000

3.00

04.

000

5.00

0

E1.

500

2.00

02.

500

3.00

0

F.2

50.3

44.3

75.4

69

G .500

.688

.750

1.06

2

H 0.00

.250

.203

.437

JA .750

1.15

61.

156

1.87

5

KA 1.37

51.

875

2.25

03.

500

L1.

437

2.09

42.

281

3.62

5

O2.

000

3.00

03.

000

5.00

0

PA .875

1.87

51.

875

3.50

0

Q2.

000

3.00

03.

500

5.00

0

R .500

.625

.750

1.50

0

S .250

.500

.500

1.25

0

TA1.

500

2.00

02.

000

2.50

0

LETT

ER D

IMEN

SION

U .312

.562

.375

.750

V.4

998/

.500

3.8

748/

.875

31.

124/

1.12

51.

749/

1.75

0

W1/

8 x

1/16

x .6

253/

16 x

3/3

2 x

1.50

01/

4 x

1/8

x 1.

500

3/8

x 3/

16 x

3.0

00

X 1/8

1/4

1/4

3/8

Y2.

849

3.95

34.

563

6.08

0

Z.0

087

.013

.013

.026

ZA 1.12

51.

500

1.87

52.

875

M1/

4-20

x .3

12 D

P5/

16-1

8 x

.500

DP

3/8-

16 x

.625

DP

3/4-

10 x

1.2

50 D

P

QUIC

K RE

FERE

NCE

FOR:

A +

(T° x

B)

SERI

ES10

00 &

200

030

00 &

400

050

00 &

600

070

00 &

800

0

456.

481

9.07

610

.296

14.5

00

907.

264

10.2

4611

.466

16.8

40

180

8.83

012

.586

13.8

0621

.520

270

10.3

9614

.926

16.1

4626

.200

360

11.9

6217

.266

18.4

8630

.880

450

13.5

2819

.606

20.8

2635

.560

DEGR

EE O

F RO

TATI

ON

PORT

PRE

SSUR

IZED

- FU

LL C

CW P

OSIT

ION

C1 O

N SE

RIES

100

0, 3

000,

500

0, &

700

0OR

C1 &

E O

N SE

RIES

200

0, 4

000,

600

0, &

800

0

PORT

PRE

SSUR

IZED

- FU

LL C

W P

OSIT

ION

C2 O

N SE

RIES

100

0, 3

000,

500

0, &

700

0OR

C2 &

A O

N SE

RIES

200

0, 4

000,

600

0, &

800

0

OPTI

ON L

OCAT

ION

REFE

RENC

ELE

TTER

OPT

ION

REFE

RENC

ED B

Y TU

BE N

UMBE

RAC

TUAT

ORTY

PER1

xA &

R2x

AR1

xH &

R2x

H

PORT

& N

EEDL

E LO

CATI

ONS

REFE

RENC

ED B

Y CI

RCLE

D NU

MBE

RS

-A1 II II

-A2 I I

-A-D

1 II II

-D2 I I

-D-M I &

III &

II

-E I & II

I & II

-TPO

RT 4 4

-P 1 1

-D 1 1

-QPO

RT 3 3

-P 2 2

-D 2 2

-OPO

RT 1 1

-P 2 2

-D 2 2

-B1 II N/A

-B2 I N/A

-B-P

1 II II

-P2 I I

-P-N I &

IIN/

A

STAN

DARD

PORT 2 2

-P 1 1

-D 1 1

SPEC

IFIE

D BY

R2x

xW

HEN

ORDE

RING

PA

U

O

Q R

TAS

V DI

A

W K

EYW

AY

M T

HREA

D4X

EAC

H FR

ONT,

BACK

& B

OTTO

M

+.00

1-.0

00DI

ANB

A +

(T° x

B)

Y +

(T° x

Z)

ZA M

AX HFG

JA

C

C/2

LKA

SQ

X NP

TOP

TION

ALAN

GLE

ADJU

STM

ENT

E D

III IV

III

ZA M

AX

C1 A

C2 E

NB1.

125

x .0

56 D

P2.

000

x .0

39 D

P2.

1654

x .0

52 D

P3.

3465

x .1

20 D

P

SHAF

T KE

YWAY

: SHO

WN

AT M

ID-R

OTAT

ION

PORT

POS

ITIO

N: IN

DICA

TED

BY C

IRCL

ED N

UMBE

RS

-O

& -Q

AVA

ILAB

LE O

N SE

RIES

100

0, 3

000,

500

0, &

700

0 ON

LYTU

BES

III &

IV: I

NCLU

DED

ON S

ERIE

S 20

00, 4

000,

600

0, &

800

0 UN

ITS

ONLY

MTG

. HOL

ES: C

ENTE

RED

ON C

ENTE

RLIN

E OF

ACT

UATO

R BO

DYCU

SHIO

NS: S

ERIE

S 10

00 &

200

0 AC

TUAT

ORS

ADD

1/2

" TO

RESP

ECTI

VE “

A” A

ND “

Y” D

IMEN

SION

S FO

R EA

CH C

USHI

ON

4

3

2 2

3

4

1

III

T°


IMPERIAL

(800) 624-8511www.phdinc.com/18000r

3C


DIMENSIONS: SERIES 1000-8000 ROTARY ACTUATORS


METRIC

SERI

ES10

00 &

200

030

00 &

400

050

00 &

600

070

00 &

800

0

LETT

ER D

IMEN

SION

V12

.69/

12.7

122

.22/

22.2

328

.55/

28.5

844

.42/

44.4

5

W3.

15 x

1.5

9 x

164.

75 x

2.3

6 x

386.

35 x

3.1

8 x

389.

53 x

2.3

6 x

78

QUIC

K RE

FERE

NCE

FOR:

A +

(T° x

B)

SERI

ES10

00 &

200

030

00 &

400

050

00 &

600

070

00 &

800

0

DEGR

EE O

F RO

TATI

ON

PORT

PRE

SSUR

IZED

- FU

LL C

CW P

OSIT

ION

C1 O

N SE

RIES

100

0, 3

000,

500

0, &

700

0OR

C1 &

E O

N SE

RIES

200

0, 4

000,

600

0, &

800

0

PORT

PRE

SSUR

IZED

- FU

LL C

W P

OSIT

ION

C2 O

N SE

RIES

100

0, 3

000,

500

0, &

700

0OR

C2 &

A O

N SE

RIES

200

0, 4

000,

600

0, &

800

0

OPTI

ON L

OCAT

ION

REFE

RENC

ELE

TTER

OPT

ION

REFE

RENC

ED B

Y TU

BE N

UMBE

RAC

TUAT

ORTY

PER1

xA &

R2x

AR1

xH &

R2x

H

PORT

& N

EEDL

E LO

CATI

ONS

REFE

RENC

ED B

Y CI

RCLE

D NU

MBE

RS

-A1 II II

-A2 I I

-A-D

1 II II

-D2 I I

-D-M I &

III &

II

-E I & II

I & II

-TPO

RT 4 4

-P 1 1

-D 1 1

-QPO

RT 3 3

-P 2 2

-D 2 2

-OPO

RT 1 1

-P 2 2

-D 2 2

-B1 II —

-B2 I —

-B-P

1 II II

-P2 I I

-P-N I &

IIN/

A

STAN

DARD

PORT 2 2

-P 1 1

-D 1 1

V12

.00/

11.9

722

.00/

21.9

628

.00/

27.9

644

.00/

43.9

6

W4

x 2.

5 x

156

x 3.

5 x

328

x 5

x 40

12 x

5 x

56

SPEC

IFIE

D BY

R2x

xW

HEN

ORDE

RING

PA

U

O

Q R

TAS

V DI

A

W K

EYW

AY

M T

HREA

D4X

EAC

H FR

ONT,

BACK

& B

OTTO

M

+.02

5-.0

00DI

ANB

A +

(T° x

B)

Y +

(T° x

Z)

ZA M

AX HFG

JA

C

C/2

LKA

SQ

X B

SPOP

TION

ALAN

GLE

ADJU

STM

ENT

E D

III IV

III

ZA M

AX

C1 A

C2 E

NB28

.58

x 1.

4 DP

50.8

0 x

1.0

DP55

.00

x 1.

3 DP

85.0

0 x

3.0

DP

SHAF

T KE

YWAY

: SHO

WN

AT M

ID-R

OTAT

ION

PORT

POS

ITIO

N: IN

DICA

TED

BY C

IRCL

ED N

UMBE

RS

-O

& -Q

AVA

ILAB

LE O

N SE

RIES

100

0, 3

000,

500

0, &

700

0 ON

LYTU

BES

III &

IV: I

NCLU

DED

ON S

ERIE

S 20

00, 4

000,

600

0, &

800

0 UN

ITS

ONLY

MTG

. HOL

ES: C

ENTE

RED

ON C

ENTE

RLIN

E OF

ACT

UATO

R BO

DYCU

SHIO

NS: S

ERIE

S 10

00 &

200

0 AC

TUAT

ORS

ADD

13

mm

TO

RESP

ECTI

VE “

A” A

ND “

Y” D

IMEN

SION

S FO

R EA

CH C

USHI

ON

4

3

2 2

3

4

1

III

T°

A 145

201

232

302

B 0.44

0.66

0.66

1.33

C 76 108

127

203

D 51 76 102

127

E38

.150

.863

.576

.2

F 6 9 10 12

G 13 17 19 27

H 0 6 5 11

JA 19 29 29 48

KA 35 48 57 89

L 36 53 58 92

O 50.8

76.2

76.2

127.

0

PA 22 48 48 89

Q 50.8

76.2

88.9

127.

0

R 13 16 19 38

S 6 13 13 32

TA 38.1

50.8

50.8

63.5

U 8 14 10 19

Y 72 100

116

154

Z0.

220.

330.

330.

66

ZA 29 38 48 73

MM

6 x

1.0

x 8

M8

x 1.

0 x

13M

10 x

1.5

x 1

6M

20 x

2.5

x 3

2

4516

4.6

230.

526

1.5

368.

3

9018

4.5

260.

229

1.1

427.

7

180

224.

331

9.7

351.

454

8.0

270

264.

137

9.1

410.

166

5.5

360

303.

843

8.6

469.

578

4.4

450

343.

649

8.0

529.

090

3.2

IMPE

RIAL

SHA

FTS*

MET

RIC

SHAF

TS*

* BO

TH IM

PERI

AL A

ND M

ETRI

C SH

AFT

OPTI

ONS

AVAI

LABL

E ON

MET

RIC

BODY

(IM

PERI

AL S

HAFT

= D

ESIG

N 5,

AND

MET

RIC

SHAF

T =

DESI

GN 6

).

NUM

BERS

ARE

FOR

MET

RIC

UNIT

S AN

D AR

E IN

mm

.

X 1/8

1/4

1/4

3/8

(800) 624-8511www.phdinc.com/18000r

3C


ORDERING DATA: AIR/OIL TANDEM ROTARY ACTUATORS

ANGL

E OF

ROT

ATIO

NST

ANDA

RD A

NGLE

S45

°, 90

°, 18

0°, 2

70°,

360°

, and

450

°Fo

r oth

er a

vaila

ble

rota

tions

, con

sult

PHD.

R1 3

R-

9018

0-

DM

-V

TO O

RDER

SPE

CIFY

:Ty

pe, D

esig

n No

., Se

ries,

Angl

e of

Rot

atio

n, a

nd O

ptio

ns.

--

A2

SERI

ES2

(000

) 1" B

ore

Doub

le R

ack

4 (0

00) 1

-3/8

" Bor

e Do

uble

Rac

k6

(000

) 2" B

ore

Doub

le R

ack

8 (0

00) 3

" Bor

e Do

uble

Rac

k

(

Oil S

ectio

n is

2" B

ore)

NOTE

:Sen

sor m

ust b

e us

ed w

ith a

PHD

Set P

oint

Mod

ule.

See

Sw

itche

s an

dSe

nsor

s se

ctio

n fo

r inf

orm

atio

n an

dor

derin

g da

ta.

-3

CUSH

ION

D-C

ushi

ons

both

dire

ctio

nsD1

-Cus

hion

clo

ckw

ise

D2-C

ushi

on c

ount

ercl

ockw

ise

ANGL

E AD

JUST

MEN

TA

-An

gle

adju

stm

ent b

oth

ends

A1-

Angl

e ad

just

men

t clo

ckw

ise

30°

A2-

Angl

e ad

just

men

t cou

nter

cloc

kwis

e 30

°

PORT

CON

TROL

©

BUIL

T-IN

MET

ER O

UTFL

OW C

ONTR

OL V

ALVE

Port

Cont

rol i

s st

anda

rd o

nal

l Air/

Oil T

ande

m A

ctua

tors

.

UNIT

S W

ITH

IMPE

RIAL

SHA

FTS

AND

KEYW

AY

ANGL

E OF

ROT

ATIO

NFR

OM P

OSIT

ION

ITO

POS

ITIO

N II

Use

this

dig

it fo

r 3Po

sitio

n Ta

ndem

s on

ly.

OPTI

ONS

C-C

ross

Key

Pin

ion

Shaf

tE

-Mag

netic

Pis

ton

for H

all E

ffect

Sw

itch

G-S

haft

Seal

bot

h si

des

H-H

ollo

w P

inio

n Sh

aft (

not a

vaila

ble

on ty

pe R

23R)

I-P

ort P

ositi

on 1

top

rack

Port

Posi

tion

3 bo

ttom

rack

J-H

all S

enso

r (Se

t Poi

nt M

odul

e is

ord

ered

sepa

rate

ly) f

or u

nits

not

exc

eedi

ng 1

80°

K-P

relo

ad K

eyw

ay P

inio

n Sh

aft

L-C

ount

ercl

ockw

ise

Unid

irect

iona

l Clu

tch

M-M

agne

tic P

isto

n fo

r Ree

d Sw

itch

N-P

ilot V

alve

Act

uato

r (PV

A)R

-Clo

ckw

ise

Unid

irect

iona

l Clu

tch

T-P

ort i

n Po

sitio

n 4

V-F

luor

o-El

asto

mer

Sea

lsW

-Clo

se T

oler

ance

Rot

atio

n, +

30 m

inut

es, -

0Y

-Tan

dem

Cap

rota

ted

180°

Z1- E

lect

role

ss N

icke

l Pla

te

3 RO

TARY

POS

ITIO

NSUs

e th

is d

igit

for 3

Posi

tion

Tand

ems

only.

TYPE

IMPE

RIAL

MET

RIC

R13R

-Sin

gle

Shaf

t Ext

.R1

8R-

Sing

le S

haft

Ext.

Air/O

il Ta

ndem

Air/O

il Ta

ndem

R23R

-Dou

ble

Shaf

t Ext

.R2

8R-

Doub

le S

haft

Ext.

Air/O

il Ta

ndem

Air/O

il Ta

ndem SIZE

NO.

-32

-34

-38

-39

See

Switc

hes

and

Sens

ors

sect

ion

for c

ompl

ete

orde

ring

info

rmat

ion.

PROX

IMIT

Y SW

ITCH

MOU

NTIN

G BR

ACKE

TS

SERI

ES20

0040

0060

0080

00

DESI

GN N

O.3

-Im

peria

l - P

orts

and

mou

ntin

g ho

les

are

impe

rial

8-

Met

ric -

Ports

and

mou

ntin

g ho

les

are

met

ric.

Pino

n sh

aft a

nd k

eyw

ay a

re i

mpe

rial.

IMPERIAL

!Op

tions

may

affe

ct u

nit l

engt

h.Se

e un

it di

men

sion

and

opt

ions

page

s fo

r add

ers.

(800) 624-8511www.phdinc.com/28000r

3C


ORDERING DATA: AIR/OIL TANDEM ROTARY ACTUATORS

R1 9

R-

9018

0-

DM

-V

TO O

RDER

SPE

CIFY

:Ty

pe, D

esig

n No

., Se

ries,

Angl

e of

Rot

atio

n, a

nd O

ptio

ns.

--

A2

SERI

ES2

(000

) 1" B

ore

Doub

le R

ack

4 (0

00) 1

-3/8

" Bor

e Do

uble

Rac

k6

(000

) 2" B

ore

Doub

le R

ack

8 (0

00) 3

" Bor

e Do

uble

Rac

k

(

Oil S

ectio

n is

2" B

ore)

NOTE

:Sen

sor m

ust b

e us

ed w

ith a

PHD

Set

Poin

t Mod

ule.

See

Sw

itche

s an

d Se

nsor

s se

ctio

nfo

r inf

orm

atio

n an

d or

derin

g da

ta.

-3

CUSH

ION

D-C

ushi

ons

both

dire

ctio

nsD1

-Cus

hion

clo

ckw

ise

D2-C

ushi

on c

ount

ercl

ockw

ise

ANGL

E AD

JUST

MEN

TA

-An

gle

adju

stm

ent b

oth

ends

A1-

Angl

e ad

just

men

t clo

ckw

ise

30°

A2-

Angl

e ad

just

men

t cou

nter

cloc

kwis

e 30

°

PORT

CON

TROL

©

BUIL

T-IN

MET

ER O

UTFL

OW C

ONTR

OL V

ALVE

Port

Cont

rol i

s st

anda

rd o

nal

l Air/

Oil T

ande

m A

ctua

tors

.

SIZE

NO.

-32

-34

-38

-39

See

Switc

hes

and

Sens

ors

sect

ion

for c

ompl

ete

orde

ring

info

rmat

ion.

PROX

IMIT

Y SW

ITCH

MOU

NTIN

G BR

ACKE

TS

SERI

ES20

0040

0060

0080

00ANGL

E OF

ROT

ATIO

NFR

OM P

OSIT

ION

ITO

POS

ITIO

N II

Use

this

dig

it fo

r 3Po

sitio

n Ta

ndem

s on

ly.

OPTI

ONS

E-M

agne

tic P

isto

n fo

r Hal

l Effe

ct S

witc

hI

-Por

t Pos

ition

1 to

p ra

ckPo

rt Po

sitio

n 3

botto

m ra

ckM

-Mag

netic

Pis

ton

for R

eed

Switc

hT

-Por

t in

Posi

tion

4V

-Flu

oro-

Elas

tom

er S

eals

W-C

lose

Tol

eran

ce R

otat

ion,

+30

min

utes

, -0

Y-T

ande

m C

ap ro

tate

d 18

0°Z1

- Ele

ctro

less

Nic

kel P

late

ANGL

E OF

ROT

ATIO

NST

ANDA

RD A

NGLE

S45

°, 9

0°, 1

80°,

270

°,36

0°, a

nd 4

50°

For o

ther

ava

ilabl

ero

tatio

ns, c

onsu

lt PH

D.

3 RO

TARY

POS

ITIO

NSUs

e th

is d

igit

for 3

Posi

tion

Tand

ems

only.

TYPE

R19R

-Si

ngle

Sha

ft Ex

t.Ai

r/Oil

Tand

emR2

9R-

Doub

le S

haft

Ext.

Air/O

il Ta

ndem

UNIT

S W

ITH

MET

RIC

SHAF

TS A

ND K

EYW

AY

DESI

GN N

O.9

-M

etric

- Po

rts, m

ount

ing

hole

s, p

inio

nsh

aft a

nd k

eyw

ay a

re m

etric

.

METRIC

!Op

tions

may

affe

ct u

nit l

engt

h.Se

e un

it di

men

sion

and

opt

ions

page

s fo

r add

ers.

(800) 624-8511www.phdinc.com/28000r

3C


AIR/OIL TANDEM ROTARY ACTUATORS:SERIES 2000-8000

A

B

OPERATING PRINCIPLEThis feature is available on Series 2000, 4000, 6000,

and 8000. One end functions as a control member only,reducing the effective output torque to match 1000, 3000,5000, and 7000 respectively.

The illustration shows a Tandem Actuator with built-inPort Controls®, crossover manifold and oil reservoir. Thelatter serves as an accumulator to compensate for oilvolume changes due to temperature variation.

NOTE: The Reservoir should have 20 psi [1.3 bar]pressure at all times to ensure the system remains purged.



2000 4000 6000 8000.38 1.1 2.3 10.6

[.63] [1.83] [3.62] [17.61]

BENEFITS

■ PHD Air/Oil Tandem Actuators provide smooth consistentrotary motion even at low speeds for applications requiringpositive control of payload.

■ Design provides simplicity and economics of air power with thesmooth control of hydraulics.

■ Oil transfer is accomplished through a one-piece tandem capeliminating external crossovers.

■ Four bore sizes are available in both 2 and 3 position modelswith standard rotations up to 450° to fit a variety ofapplication requirements.

■ Built-in flow controls are standard for precise control ofrotation speed.

■ Free floating pistons with rack and pinion design eliminatebinding for low breakaway and long unit life.


■ Available with a wide range of options including cushions,angle adjustments, shock pads, and pinion shaft options forspecifying the exact actuator for your application.


SPECIFICATIONS R1xR & R2xRPISTON SEALS (3 Per Piston) Block Vee with Back-up RingPISTONS Free Floating AluminumPINION SHAFTS One Piece Alloy SteelRACK Alloy SteelEND CAPS Zinc Plated SteelBODY Hardcoated AluminumTUBES Hardcoated Aluminum on Air side, Honed Steel on Oil sideBEARINGS Two Steel Ball BearingsPORTS NPT [BSP]LUBRICATION Permanent for Non-Lube AirWORKING PRESSURE 150 psi [10 bar] Air Max.STANDARD ROTATIONS 45°, 90°, 180°, 270°, 360°, 450°OPTIONS Cushions, Angle Adjustments, Magnetic Pistons,

Fluoro-Elastomer Seals (Port Controls® are standard)HYDRAULIC FLUID Rykon 32 (Viscosity at 100°F [38°C] is 158 SSU; at 250°F [126°C] is 45.1)

(800) 624-8511www.phdinc.com/28000r

3C


DIMENSIONS: AIR/OIL TANDEM ROTARY ACTUATORS

LETT

ER D

IMEN

SION

QUIC

K RE

FERE

NCE

FOR:

A +

(T° x

B)

DEGR

EE O

F RO

TATI

ONOP

TION

LOC

ATIO

N RE

FERE

NCE

LETT

ER O

PTIO

NRE

FERE

NCED

BY

TUBE

NUM

BER

ACTU

ATOR

TYPE

R1xR

& R

2xR

-A1 III

-A2 I

-A-P

STAN

DARD

-M I & II

I-E

I & II

I

-TPO

RT 4-P 4

-D 4

STAN

DARD

PORT 2

-P 4-D 4

SERI

ES20

0040

0060

0080

00

A6.

215

7.98

69.

190

11.1

28

B.0

174

.026

.026

.052

C3.

000

4.25

05.

000

8.00

0

D2.

000

3.00

04.

000

5.00

0

E1.

500

2.00

02.

500

3.00

0

F .250

.344

.375

.469

G .500

.688

.750

1.06

2

H 0.00

.250

.203

.437

JA .750

1.15

61.

156

1.87

5

KA 1.37

51.

875

2.25

03.

500

L1.

437

2.09

42.

281

3.62

5

LA 2.87

54.

187

4.68

76.

125

O2.

000

3.00

03.

000

5.00

0

PA .875

1.87

51.

875

3.50

0

Q2.

000

3.00

03.

500

5.00

0

R .500

.625

.750

1.50

0

S .250

.500

.500

1.25

0

TA 1.50

02.

000

2.00

02.

500

U2 .312

.562

.375

.750

V.4

998/

.500

3.8

748/

.875

31.

124/

1.12

51.

749/

1.75

0

W1/

8 x

1/16

x .6

253/

16 x

3/3

2 x

1.50

01/

4 x

1/8

x 1.

500

3/8

x 3/

16 x

3.0

00

X 1/8

1/4

1/4

3/8

Y2.

849

3.95

34.

563

6.08

0

Z.0

087

.013

.013

.026

ZA 1.12

51.

500

1.87

52.

875

M1/

4-20

x .3

12 D

P5/

16-1

8 x

.500

DP

3/8-

16 x

.625

DP

3/4-

10 x

1.2

50 D

P

U1 .125

.125

.125

1.00

0 SERI

ES20

0040

0060

0080

00

45 6.99

89.

156

10.3

6013

.468

90 7.78

110

.326

11.5

3015

.808

180

9.34

712

.666

13.8

7020

.488

270

10.9

1315

.006

16.2

1025

.168

360

12.4

7917

.346

18.5

5029

.848

450

14.0

4519

.686

20.8

9034

.528

PORT

& N

EEDL

E LO

CATI

ONS

REFE

RENC

ED B

Y CI

RCLE

D NU

MBE

RS

-D1 II

-D2 IV

-D-P

1-P

2

RESE

RVOI

R AS

SEM

BLY

IS IN

CLUD

ED W

ITH

UNIT

.DI

MEN

SION

AL D

ATA

IS IN

AIR

/OIL

& R

ESER

VOIR

SEC

TION

10.

SERI

ES 2

000,

400

0, &

600

0 UN

ITS

USE

PART

NO.

134

59-0

3-2.

SERI

ES 8

000

UNIT

S US

E PA

RT N

O. 1

3459

-02-

2.

NOTE

:THE

RES

ERVO

IR S

HOUL

D HA

VE 2

0 PS

I PRE

SSUR

E AT

ALL

TIM

ESTO

ENS

URE

THE

SYST

EM R

EMAI

NS P

URGE

D.

2X P

ORT

CONT

ROLS

CHEC

K VA

LVE

FITT

ING

SPEC

IFIE

D BY

R2x

RW

HEN

ORDE

RING

U1

PAU2

LBO

Q R

TAS

V DI

A

W K

EYW

AY2X

BLE

ED P

LUGS

M T

HREA

D4X

EAC

H FR

ONT,

BACK

& B

OTTO

M

LA/2

LA

.080

1.00

0+.

001

-.000

DIA

NB

A +

(T° x

B)

Y +

(T° x

Z)

ZA M

AX HFG

JA

C

C/2

L KA S

Q

2XX

NPT

OPTI

ONAL

ANGL

E AD

JUST

MEN

T

E D

III IV

III

C2 E

T°

PORT

PRE

SSUR

IZED

- C2

FULL

CW

POS

ITIO

NPO

RT P

RESS

URIZ

ED -

EFU

LL C

CW P

OSIT

ION

III

NB1.

125

x .0

56 D

P2.

000

x .0

39 D

P2.

1654

x .0

52 D

P3.

3465

x .1

20 D

P

LB 1.75

02.

750

2.75

03.

000

SHAF

T KE

YWAY

: SHO

WN

AT M

ID-R

OTAT

ION

PORT

POS

ITIO

N: IN

DICA

TED

BY C

IRCL

ED N

UMBE

RSM

TG. H

OLES

: CEN

TERE

D ON

CEN

TERL

INE

OF A

CTUA

TOR

BODY

42 2

3

4

1


IMPERIAL

(800) 624-8511www.phdinc.com/28000r

3C


XG1

/8G1

/4G1

/4G3

/8

Y 72 100

116

154

Z0.

220.

330.

330.

66

ZA 29 38 48 73

LETT

ER D

IMEN

SION

QUIC

K RE

FERE

NCE

FOR:

A +

(T° x

B)

DEGR

EE O

F RO

TATI

ON

SERI

ES20

0040

0060

0080

00

SERI

ES20

0040

0060

0080

00

A 158

203

233

283

B 0.44

0.66

0.66

1.32

C 76 108

127

203

D 51 76 102

127

E38

.150

.863

.576

.2

F 6 9 10 12

G 13 17 19 27

H 0 6 5 11

JA 19 29 29 48

KA 35 48 57 89

L 36 53 58 92

LA 73 106

119

156

LB 44 70 70 76

O 50.8

76.2

76.2

127.

0

PA 22 48 48 89

Q 50.8

76.2

88.9

127

R 13 16 19 38

S 6 13 13 32

TA 38.1

50.8

50.8

63.5

U2 8 14 10 19

MM

6 x

1.0

x 8

M8

x 1.

0 x

13M

10 x

1.5

x 1

6M

20 x

2.5

x 3

2

U1 3 3 3 25

4517

7.7

232.

626

3.1

342.

1

9019

7.6

262.

229

2.9

401.

5

180

237.

432

1.7

352.

352

0.4

270

277.

238

1.2

411.

763

9.3

360

317.

044

0.6

471.

275

8.1

450

356.

750

0.0

530.

987

7.0

NB28

.58

X 1.

450

.80

X 1.

055

.00

X 1.

385

.00

X 3.

0

V12

.69/

12.7

122

.22/

22.2

328

.55/

28.5

844

.42/

44.4

5

W3.

15 x

1.5

9 x

164.

75 x

2.3

6 x

386.

35 x

3.1

8 x

389.

53 x

2.3

6 x

78

V12

.00/

11.9

722

.00/

21.9

628

.00/

27.9

644

.00/

43.9

6

W4

x 2.

5 x

156

x 3.

5 x

328

x 5

x 40

12 x

5 x

56

RESE

RVOI

R AS

SEM

BLY

IS IN

CLUD

ED W

ITH

UNIT

.SE

RIES

200

0, 4

000,

& 6

000

UNIT

S US

E PA

RT N

O. 6

8397

-03-

2.SE

RIES

800

0 UN

ITS

USE

PART

NO.

683

97-0

2-2.

NOTE

:THE

RES

ERVO

IR S

HOUL

D HA

VE 1

.4 b

ar P

RESS

URE

AT A

LL T

IMES

TO E

NSUR

E TH

E SY

STEM

REM

AINS

PUR

GED.

2X P

ORT

CONT

ROLS

CHEC

K VA

LVE

FITT

ING

SPEC

IFIE

D BY

R2x

RW

HEN

ORDE

RING

U1

PAU2

LBO

Q R

TAS

V DI

A

W K

EYW

AY2X

BLE

ED P

LUGS

M T

HREA

D4X

EAC

H FR

ONT,

BACK

& B

OTTO

M

LA/2

LA

2.1

25.4

+.02

5-.0

00DI

ANB

A +

(T° x

B)

Y +

(T° x

Z)

ZA M

AX HFG

JA

C

C/2

L KA S

Q

2XX

BSP

OPTI

ONAL

ANGL

E AD

JUST

MEN

T

E D

III IV

III

C2 E

T°

PORT

PRE

SSUR

IZED

- C2

FULL

CW

POS

ITIO

NPO

RT P

RESS

URIZ

ED -

EFU

LL C

CW P

OSIT

ION

III

OPTI

ON L

OCAT

ION

REFE

RENC

ELE

TTER

OPT

ION

REFE

RENC

ED B

Y TU

BE N

UMBE

R

-A1 III

-A2 I

-A-P

STAN

DARD

-M I & II

I-E

I & II

I

-TPO

RT 4-P 4

-D 4

STAN

DARD

PORT 2

-P 4-D 4

PORT

& N

EEDL

E LO

CATI

ONS

REFE

RENC

ED B

Y CI

RCLE

D NU

MBE

RS

-D1 II

-D2

IV

-D-P

1-P

2AC

TUAT

ORTY

PER1

xR &

R2x

R

SHAF

T KE

YWAY

: SHO

WN

AT M

ID-R

OTAT

ION

PORT

POS

ITIO

N: IN

DICA

TED

BY C

IRCL

ED N

UMBE

RSM

TG. H

OLES

: CEN

TERE

D ON

CEN

TERL

INE

OF A

CTUA

TOR

BODY

42 2

3

4

1

IMPE

RIAL

SHA

FTS*

MET

RIC

SHAF

TS*

* BO

TH IM

PERI

AL A

ND M

ETRI

C SH

AFT

OPTI

ONS

AVAI

LABL

E ON

MET

RIC

BODY

(IM

PERI

AL S

HAFT

= D

ESIG

N 8,

AND

MET

RIC

SHAF

T =

DESI

GN 9

).

NUM

BERS

FOR

MET

RIC

UNIT

S AN

D AR

E IN

mm

.

DIMENSIONS: AIR/OIL TANDEM ROTARY ACTUATORS

METRIC

(800) 624-8511www.phdinc.com/28000r

3C


DIMENSIONS: 3 POSITION AIR/OIL TANDEM

ZA M

AX

F

HNB

+.00

1-.0

00DI

AG

YB +

(T° x

Z)

Y +

( T° x

Z ) M

THR

EAD

4X E

ACH

FRON

T,BA

CK &

BOT

TOM

E D

4XX

NPT

C/2

C

L

JA

KA S

QSP

ECIF

IED

BY3R

2xR

WHE

NOR

DERI

NG

STA

Q

O

U1

PA

W K

EYW

AY

V DI

A

R

FA GA

YA +

Z (T

° + J

°)

YA +

Z (T

° + K

)

V

VI

U2

RESE

RVIO

R AS

SEM

BLY

IS IN

CLUD

ED W

ITH

UNIT

.DI

MEN

SION

AL D

ATA

IS IN

AIR

/OIL

& R

ESER

VOIR

SEC

TION

10.

SERI

ES 2

000,

400

0, &

600

0 UN

ITS

USE

PART

NO.

134

59-0

3-2.

SERI

ES 8

000

UNIT

S US

E PA

RT N

O. 1

3459

-02-

2.

NOTE

:THE

RES

ERVO

IR S

HOUL

D HA

VE 2

0 PS

I PRE

SSUR

E AT

ALL

TIM

ESTO

ENS

URE

THE

SYST

EM R

EMAI

NS P

URGE

D.

1.00

0.0

80 LA

LA/2

2X B

LEED

PLU

GS

SHAF

T KE

YWAY

: SHO

WN

AT M

ID-R

OTAT

ION

PORT

POS

ITIO

NS: I

NDIC

ATED

BY

CIRC

LED

NUM

BERS

MTG

. HOL

ES: C

ENTE

RED

ON C

ENTE

RLIN

E OF

ACT

UATO

R BO

DYPL

UMBI

NG S

CHEM

ATIC

: L0C

ATED

IN E

NGIN

EERI

NG D

ATA

SECT

ION

NB1.

125

x .0

56 D

P 2

.000

x .0

39 D

P2.

1654

x .0

52 D

P3.

3465

x .1

20 D

P

LB 1.75

02.

750

2.75

03.

000

III

III

IV

LB

CHEC

K VA

LVE

FITT

ING

2X P

ORT

CONT

ROLS

1

4 4

3

22

LETT

ER D

IMEN

SION

OPTI

ON L

OCAT

ION

REFE

RENC

ELE

TTER

OPT

ION

REFE

RENC

ED B

Y TU

BE N

UMBE

RAC

TUAT

ORTY

PE3R

1xR

& 3

R2xR

-D1 II

-D2 IV

-D-M I &

III

V &

VI

-EI &

III

V &

VI

SERI

ES20

0040

0060

0080

00

PORT

& N

EEDL

E LO

CATI

ONS

REFE

RENC

ED B

Y CI

RCLE

D NU

MBE

RS

Z.0

087

.013

.013

.026

ZA 1.12

51.

500

1.87

52.

875

C3.

000

4.25

05.

000

8.00

0

D2.

000

3.00

04.

000

5.00

0

E1.

500

2.00

02.

500

3.00

0

F .500

.344

.375

.469

H 0.00

.250

.203

.437

JA .750

1.15

61.

156

1.87

5

KA 1.37

51.

875

2.25

03.

500

L1.

437

2.09

42.

281

3.62

5

LA 2.87

54.

187

4.68

76.

125

O2.

000

3.00

03.

000

5.00

0

PA .875

1.87

51.

875

3.50

0

Q2.

000

3.00

03.

500

5.00

0

R .500

.625

.750

1.50

0

S .250

.500

.500

1.25

0

TA 1.50

02.

000

2.00

02.

500

U2 .312

.562

.375

.750

V.4

998/

.500

3.8

748/

.875

31.

124/

1.12

51.

749/

1.75

0

W1/

8 x

1/16

x .6

253/

16 x

3/3

2 x

1.50

01/

4 x

1/8

x 1.

500

3/8

x 3/

16 x

3.0

00

X 1/8

1/4

1/4

3/8

Y3.

366

4.03

34.

627

5.04

8

M1/

4-20

x .3

12 D

P5/

16-1

8 x

.500

DP

3/8-

16 x

.625

DP

3/4-

10 x

1.2

50 D

P

U1 .125

.125

.125

1.00

0

FA .500

.375

.344

.469

G .750

.688

.750

1.06

2

GA .750

.719

.719

1.06

2

YA 5.98

36.

721

7.32

59.

865

YB 2.59

93.

360

3.98

05.

236

-AST

ANDA

RD

-P

STAN

DARD

-P1

-P2

-TPO

RT 4-P 4

-D 4

STAN

DARD

PORT 2

-P 4-D 4

C2 E

D 1

D2

OPTI

ONAL

ANGL

E AD

JUST

MEN

T

III

I

POR

TS P

RES

SUR

IZED

D1

& D

2

II

PORT

PRE

SSUR

IZED

- E

FULL

CCW

POS

ITIO

NPO

RT P

RESS

URIZ

ED -

C2FU

LL C

W P

OSIT

ION

T°

K°J°


IMPERIAL

(800) 624-8511www.phdinc.com/28000r

3C


ZA M

AX

F

HNB

+.02

5-.0

00DI

AG

YB +

(T° x

Z)

Y +

( T° x

Z ) M

THR

EAD

4X E

ACH

FRON

T,BA

CK &

BOT

TOM

E D

4XX

BSP

C/2

C

L

JA

KA S

QSP

ECIF

IED

BY3R

2xR

WHE

NOR

DERI

NG

STA

Q

O

U1

PA

W K

EYW

AY

V DI

A

R

FA GA

YA +

Z (T

° + J

°)

YA +

Z (T

° + K

)

V

VI

U2

RESE

RVIO

R AS

SEM

BLY

IS IN

CLUD

ED W

ITH

UNIT

.SE

RIES

200

0, 4

000,

& 6

000

UNIT

S US

E PA

RT N

O. 6

8397

-03-

2.SE

RIES

800

0 UN

ITS

USE

PART

NO.

683

97-0

2-2.

NOTE

:THE

RES

ERVO

IR S

HOUL

D HA

VE 1

.4 B

AR P

RESS

URE

AT A

LL T

IMES

TO E

NSUR

E TH

E SY

STEM

REM

AINS

PUR

GED.

25.4

2.1 LA

LA/2

2X B

LEED

PLU

GS

SHAF

T KE

YWAY

: SHO

WN

AT M

ID-R

OTAT

ION

PORT

POS

ITIO

NS: I

NDIC

ATED

BY

CIRC

LED

NUM

BERS

MTG

. HOL

ES: C

ENTE

RED

ON C

ENTE

RLIN

E OF

ACT

UATO

R BO

DYPL

UMBI

NG S

CHEM

ATIC

: L0C

ATED

IN E

NGIN

EERI

NG D

ATA

SECT

ION

III

III

IV

LB

CHEC

K VA

LVE

FITT

ING

2X P

ORT

CONT

ROLS

1

4 4

3

22

OPTI

ON L

OCAT

ION

REFE

RENC

ELE

TTER

OPT

ION

REFE

RENC

ED B

Y TU

BE N

UMBE

RAC

TUAT

ORTY

PE3R

1xR

& 3

R2xR

-D1 II

-D2

IV

-D-M I &

III

V &

VI

-EI &

III

V &

VI

PORT

& N

EEDL

E LO

CATI

ONS

REFE

RENC

ED B

Y CI

RCLE

D NU

MBE

RS

-AST

ANDA

RD

-P

STAN

DARD

-P1

-P2

-TPO

RT 4-P 4

-D 4

STAN

DARD

PORT 2

-P 4-D 4

LETT

ER D

IMEN

SION

SERI

ES20

0040

0060

0080

00

C 76 108

127

203

D 51 76 102

127

E38

.150

.863

.576

.2

F 13 9 10 12

G 19 17 19 27

H 0 6 5 11

JA 19 29 29 48

KA 35 48 57 89

L 36 53 58 92

O 50.8

76.2

76.2

127.

0

PA 22 48 48 89

Q 50.8

76.2

88.9

127.

0

R 13 16 19 38

S 6 13 13 32

TA 38.1

50.8

50.8

63.5

U2 8 14 10 19

XG1

/8G1

/4G1

/4G3

/8

Y 85 102

118

128

Z0.

220.

330.

330.

66

ZA 29 38 48 73

MM

6 x

1.0

x 8

M8

x 1.

0 x

13M

10 x

1.5

x 1

6M

20 x

2.5

x 3

2

FA 13 10 9 12

GA 19 18 18 27

U1 3 3 3 25

YA 152

171

186

251

YB 66 85 101

133

LA 73.0

106.

411

9.1

155.

6

LB 44.5

69.9

69.9

76.2

NB28

.58

x 1.

4 DP

50.8

0 x

1.0

DP55

.00

x 1.

3 DP

85.0

0 x

3.0

DP

V12

.69/

12.7

122

.22/

22.2

328

.55/

28.5

844

.42/

44.4

5

W3.

15 x

1.5

9 x

164.

75 x

2.3

6 x

386.

35 x

3.1

8 x

389.

53 x

2.3

6 x

78

V12

.00/

11.9

722

.00/

21.9

628

.00/

27.9

644

.00/

43.9

6

W4

x 2.

5 x

156

x 3.

5 x

328

x 5

x 40

12 x

5 x

56

C2 E

D 1

D2

OPTI

ONAL

ANGL

E AD

JUST

MEN

T

III

I

POR

TS P

RES

SUR

IZED

D1

& D

2

II

PORT

PRE

SSUR

IZED

- E

FULL

CCW

POS

ITIO

NPO

RT P

RESS

URIZ

ED -

C2FU

LL C

W P

OSIT

ION

T°

K°J°

IMPE

RIAL

SHA

FTS*

MET

RIC

SHAF

TS*

* BO

TH IM

PERI

AL A

ND M

ETRI

C SH

AFT

OPTI

ONS

AVAI

LABL

E ON

MET

RIC

BODY

(IM

PERI

AL S

HAFT

= D

ESIG

N 8,

AND

MET

RIC

SHAF

T =

DESI

GN 9

).

NUM

BERS

FOR

MET

RIC

UNIT

S AN

D AR

E IN

mm

.

DIMENSIONS: 3 POSITION AIR/OIL TANDEM

METRIC

(800) 624-8511www.phdinc.com/28000r

3C


ORDERING DATA: MULTI-POSITION ROTARY ACTUATORS

NOTE

S:1)

Angl

e Ad

just

men

ts a

re s

tand

ard

on a

ll M

ulti-

Posi

tion

Rota

ry A

ctua

tors

.2)

Sens

or m

ust b

e us

ed w

ith a

PHD

Set

Poi

nt M

odul

e.Se

e Sw

itche

s an

d Se

nsor

s se

ctio

n fo

r inf

orm

atio

nan

d or

derin

g da

ta.

R1 1

A-

9018

0-

P-D

TO O

RDER

SPE

CIFY

:No

. of R

otar

y Po

sitio

ns, T

ype,

Des

ign

No.,

Serie

s,To

tal A

ngle

of R

otat

ion,

Var

ious

Ang

le P

ositi

ons,

and

Optio

ns.

TOTA

L AN

GLE

OF R

OTAT

ION

STAN

DARD

ANG

LES

-

ANGL

E OF

ROT

ATIO

NFR

OM P

OSIT

ION

ITO

POS

ITIO

N II

4

SERI

ES2

(000

) 1" B

ore

Doub

le R

ack

4 (0

00) 1

-3/8

" Bor

e Do

uble

Rac

k6

(000

) 2" B

ore

Doub

le R

ack

8 (0

00) 3

" Bor

e Do

uble

Rac

kNO

TE: 2

000

Serie

s av

aila

ble

in3

Posi

tion

only.

-

ANGL

E OF

ROT

ATIO

NFR

OM P

OSIT

ION

ITO

POS

ITIO

N III

. US

EDON

4 &

5 P

OSIT

ION

ONLY

.

45-

-

ANGL

E OF

ROT

ATIO

NFR

OM P

OSIT

ION

ITO

POS

ITIO

N IV

. US

EDON

5 P

OSIT

ION

ONLY

.

OPTI

ONS

B-S

hock

Pad

s on

ext

rem

e po

sitio

ns (n

otav

aila

ble

on h

ydra

ulic

uni

ts)

C-C

ross

Key

Pin

ion

Shaf

tD

-Cus

hion

s on

ext

rem

e po

sitio

nsE

-Mag

netic

Pis

ton

(All)

or H

all E

ffect

Sw

itch

G-S

haft

Seal

bot

h si

des

H-H

ollo

w P

inio

n Sh

aft (

not a

vaila

ble

on ty

peR2

1x)

I-P

ort P

ositi

on 1

on

top

rack

Port

Posi

tion

3 on

bot

tom

rack

J-H

all S

enso

r for

rota

tions

not

exc

eedi

ng 1

80°

(Set

Poi

nt M

odul

e is

ord

ered

sep

arat

ely)

K-P

relo

ad K

eyw

ay P

inio

n Sh

aft

M-M

agne

tic P

isto

n (A

ll) fo

r Ree

d Sw

itch

P-P

ort C

ontro

ls o

n al

l cap

sT

-Por

t in

Posi

tion

4V

- Flu

oro-

Elas

tom

er S

eals

135

SERI

ES20

0040

0060

0080

00

SIZE

NO.

-32

-34

-38

-39

See

Switc

hes

and

Sens

ors

sect

ion

for c

ompl

ete

orde

ring

info

rmat

ion.

PROX

IMIT

Y SW

ITCH

MOU

NTIN

G BR

ACKE

TS

TYPE

IMPE

RIAL

MET

RIC

R11A

-Sin

gle

Shaf

t Ext

.R1

5A-S

ingl

e Sh

aft E

xt.

150

psi A

ir M

ax.

10 b

ar A

ir M

ax.

R21A

-Dou

ble

Shaf

t Ext

.R2

5A-D

oubl

e Sh

aft E

xt.

150

psi A

ir M

ax.

10 b

ar A

ir M

ax.

R11H

-Sin

gle

Shaf

t Ext

.R1

5H-S

ingl

e Sh

aft E

xt.

1500

psi

Hyd

. Max

.10

0 ba

r Hy

d. M

ax.

R21H

-Dou

ble

Shaf

t Ext

.R2

5H-D

oubl

e Sh

aft E

xt.

1500

psi

Hyd

. Max

.10

0 ba

r Hy

d. M

ax.

UNIT

S W

ITH

IMPE

RIAL

SHA

FTS

AND

KEYW

AY

5

DESI

GN N

O.1

-Im

peria

l - P

ort a

nd m

ount

ing

hole

s ar

e im

peria

l.5

-Met

ric -

Port

and

mou

ntin

g ho

les

are

met

ric.

Pini

on s

hafts

and

key

way

are

impe

rial.

NO. O

FRO

TARY

POS

ITIO

NS3

- 3 P

ositi

on4

- 4 P

ositi

on5

- 5 P

ositi

on

IMPERIAL

!Op

tions

may

affe

ct u

nit l

engt

h.Se

e un

it di

men

sion

and

opt

ions

page

s fo

r add

ers.

(800) 624-8511www.phdinc.com/multir

3C


ORDERING DATA: MULTI-POSITION ROTARY ACTUATORS

-90

180

-P-

D

TO O

RDER

SPE

CIFY

:No

. of R

otar

y Po

sitio

ns, T

ype,

Des

ign

No.,

Serie

s,To

tal A

ngle

of R

otat

ion,

Var

ious

Ang

le P

ositi

ons,

and

Optio

ns.

TOTA

L AN

GLE

OF R

OTAT

ION

STAN

DARD

ANG

LES

-

ANGL

E OF

ROT

ATIO

NFR

OM P

OSIT

ION

ITO

POS

ITIO

N II

4

SERI

ES2

(000

) 1" B

ore

Doub

le R

ack

4 (0

00) 1

-3/8

" Bor

e Do

uble

Rac

k6

(000

) 2" B

ore

Doub

le R

ack

8 (0

00) 3

" Bor

e Do

uble

Rac

kNO

TE: 2

000

Serie

s av

aila

ble

in3

Posi

tion

only.

-

ANGL

E OF

ROT

ATIO

NFR

OM P

OSIT

ION

ITO

POS

ITIO

N III

. US

EDON

4 &

5 P

OSIT

ION

ONLY

.

45-

ANGL

E OF

ROT

ATIO

NFR

OM P

OSIT

ION

ITO

POS

ITIO

N IV

. US

EDON

5 P

OSIT

ION

ONLY

.

OPTI

ONS

B-S

hock

Pad

s on

ext

rem

e po

sitio

ns (n

otav

aila

ble

on h

ydra

ulic

uni

ts)

D-C

ushi

ons

on e

xtre

me

posi

tions

E-M

agne

tic P

isto

n (A

ll) o

r Hal

l Effe

ct S

witc

hG

-Sha

ft Se

al b

oth

side

sM

-Mag

netic

Pis

ton

(All)

for R

eed

Switc

hP

-Por

t Con

trols

on

all c

aps

T-P

ort i

n Po

sitio

n 4

V - F

luor

o-El

asto

mer

Sea

ls

135

SERI

ES20

0040

0060

0080

00

SIZE

NO.

-32

-34

-38

-39

See

Switc

hes

and

Sens

ors

sect

ion

for c

ompl

ete

orde

ring

info

rmat

ion.

PROX

IMIT

Y SW

ITCH

MOU

NTIN

G BR

ACKE

TS

TYPE

R16A

-Sin

gle

Shaf

t Ext

.10

bar

Air

Max

.R2

6A-D

oubl

e Sh

aft E

xt.

10 b

ar A

ir M

ax.

R16H

-Sin

gle

Shaf

t Ext

.10

0 ba

r Hyd

. Max

.R2

6H-D

oubl

e Sh

aft E

xt.

100

bar H

yd. M

ax.

UNIT

S W

ITH

MET

RIC

SHAF

TS A

ND K

EYW

AY

NOTE

S:1)

Angl

e Ad

just

men

ts a

re s

tand

ard

on a

ll M

ulti-

Posi

tion

Rota

ry A

ctua

tors

.2)

Sens

or m

ust b

e us

ed w

ith a

PHD

Set

Poi

nt M

odul

e.Se

e Sw

itche

s an

d Se

nsor

s se

ctio

n fo

r inf

orm

atio

nan

d or

derin

g da

ta.

-5

DESI

GN N

O.6

-Met

ric -

Ports

, mou

ntin

g ho

les,

pi

nion

sha

fts a

nd k

eyw

ay a

re m

etric

.

NO. O

FRO

TARY

POS

ITIO

NS3

- 3 P

ositi

on4

- 4 P

ositi

on5

- 5 P

ositi

on

R1 6

A

METRIC

!Op

tions

may

affe

ct u

nit l

engt

h.Se

e un

it di

men

sion

and

opt

ions

page

s fo

r add

ers.


3C


MULTI-POSITION ROTARY ACTUATORS:SERIES 2000-8000

B1C1C2D1

B2AED2

X

Y

OPERATING PRINCIPLEPHD Rotary Actuators and Multi-Motion Actuators

can be provided to yield three, four, or five output shaftpositions. The intermediate angle increments are fixed asspecified and only the extreme positions can be adjustedin the field.

Units are available for air or hydraulic service. Theschematic example shows a five position rotary actuator.Pressurizing Port E provides full counter clockwiserotation (Position I). Pressurizing Ports D1 and D2 trapsthe rack between the rod ends of the two outer pistons Xand Y to rotate output shaft to Position II. PressurizingPorts C1 and C2 moves floating pistons in the inside uppercylinders against stop tubes to trap the rack in Position III.Similarly, Positions IV and V can be obtained bypressurizing Ports B1, B2 and A respectively.

Output positions can be selected in any sequenceallowing the actuator to stop at, or pass, any of theintermediate positions (II, III, or IV).



2000 4000 6000 8000.38 1.1 2.3 10.6

[.63] [1.83] [3.62] [17.61]

BENEFITS

■ PHD Multi-Position Rotary Actuators are offered in3, 4, or 5 output shaft positions ideal for feeding andpositioning applications.

■ Multiple positioning design eliminates expensive andcumbersome fixturing and pinning.

■ PHD Multi-Position Actuators are pneumatically orhydraulically powered providing output torques up to15,900 in-lb [1797 Nm].

■ Four bore sizes are available with extreme position rotation upto 450° to fit a variety of requirements.

■ Free floating pistons with rack and pinion design eliminatebinding for low breakaway and long unit life.


■ Available with a wide range of options including built-in flowcontrols, cushions, shock pads, and pinion shaft optionsspecifying the exact actuator for your application.


TYPESPECIFICATIONS R1xA & R2xA R1xH & R2xHPISTON SEALS (3 Per Piston) Block Vee with Back-up RingPISTONS Free Floating AluminumTUBE SEALS Square CutPINION SHAFTS One Piece Alloy SteelRACKS Alloy SteelEND CAPS Zinc Plated SteelBODY Hardcoated AluminumTUBES Hardcoated Aluminum Hardcoated Aluminum on Series 2000 & 4000

— Honed Steel on Series 6000 & 8000BEARINGS (2) Steel Ball BearingsPORTS NPT [BSP]LUBRICATION Permanent for Non-Lube Air —WORKING PRESSURE 150 psi [10 bar] Air Max. 1500 psi [100 bar] Hyd. Max.STANDARD ROTATIONS 45°, 90°, 180°, 270°, 360°, 450°OPTIONS Port Controls®, Cushions, Magnetic Pistons,

Fluoro-Elastomer Seals (Angle Adjustment is standard)


3C


DIMENSIONS: 3 POSITION ROTARY ACTUATORS

ZA M

AX

F

H

ZA M

AX

NB+.

001

-.000

DIA

GY

+ (T

° x Z

)A

+ (T

° x B

)

M T

HREA

D4X

EAC

H FR

ONT,

BACK

& B

OTTO

M

E D

4XX

NPT

C/2

C

L

JA

KA S

Q

SPEC

IFIE

D BY

3R2

1xW

HEN

ORDE

RING

STA

Q

OU

PA

W K

EYW

AY

V DI

A

R

O2.

000

3.00

03.

000

5.00

0

NB1.

125

x .0

56 D

P 2

.000

x .0

39 D

P2.

1654

x .0

52 D

P3.

3465

x .1

20 D

P

SHAF

T KE

YWAY

: SH

OWN

AT M

ID-R

OTAT

ION

PORT

POS

ITIO

NS: I

NDIC

ATED

BY

CIRC

LED

NUM

BERS

CUSH

IONS

:SER

IES

2000

ACT

UATO

RS:

ADD

1/2"

TO

RESP

ECTI

VE “

A” A

ND “

Y” D

IMEN

SION

FOR

EAC

H CU

SHIO

NM

TG. H

OLES

: CEN

TERE

D ON

CEN

TERL

INE

OF A

CTUA

TOR

BODY

STOP

TUB

ES: L

OCAT

ED IN

TUB

ES I

& II

PLUM

BING

SCH

EMAT

IC: L

0CAT

ED IN

ENG

INEE

RING

DAT

A SE

CTIO

N

III

III

IV

QUIC

K RE

FERE

NCE

FOR:

A +

(T° x

B)

LETT

ER D

IMEN

SION

C1 A

C2 E

456.

481

9.07

610

.296

14.5

00

907.

264

10.2

4611

.466

16.8

40

180

8.83

012

.586

13.8

0621

.520

270

10.3

9614

.926

16.1

4626

.200

360

11.9

6217

.266

18.4

8630

.880

450

13.5

2819

.606

20.8

2635

.560

DEGR

EE O

F RO

TATI

ON

ACTU

ATOR

TYPE

3R11

A &

3R2

1A3R

11H

& 3

R21H

III

I

POR

TS P

RES

SUR

IZED

C 1 &

C2

II

LETT

ER O

PTIO

NRE

FERE

NCED

BY

TUBE

NUM

BER

PORT

& N

EEDL

E LO

CATI

ONS

REFE

RENC

ED B

Y CI

RCLE

D NU

MBE

RS

OPTI

ON L

OCAT

ION

REFE

RENC

E

SERI

ES20

0040

0060

0080

00

A5.

698

7.90

69.

126

12.1

60

SERI

ES20

0040

0060

0080

00

PORT

PRE

SSUR

IZED

- E

FULL

CCW

POS

ITIO

NPO

RT P

RESS

URIZ

ED -

AFU

LL C

W P

OSIT

ION

KA 1.37

51.

875

2.25

03.

500

L1.

437

2.09

42.

281

3.62

5

M1/

4-20

x .3

12 D

P5/

16-1

8 x

.500

DP

3/8-

16 x

.625

DP

3/4-

10 x

1.2

50 D

P

PA .875

1.87

51.

875

3.50

0

R .500

.625

.750

1.50

0

V.4

998/

.500

3.8

748/

.875

31.

124/

1.12

51.

749/

1.75

0

X 1/8

1/4

1/4

3/8

Z.0

087

.013

.013

.026

D2.

000

3.00

04.

000

5.00

0

C3.

000

4.25

05.

000

8.00

0

B.0

174

.026

.026

.052

E1.

500

2.00

02.

500

3.00

0

H 0.00

.250

.203

.437

G .500

.688

.750

1.06

2

F.2

50.3

44.3

75.4

69

JA .750

1.15

61.

156

1.87

5

ZA 1.12

51.

500

1.87

52.

875

Y2.

849

3.95

34.

563

6.08

0

W1/

8 x

1/16

x .6

253/

16 x

3/3

2 x

1.50

01/

4 x

1/8

x 1.

500

3/8

x 3/

16 x

3.0

00

U .312

.562

.375

.750

Q2.

000

3.00

03.

500

5.00

0

S .250

.500

.500

1.25

0

TA1.

500

2.00

02.

000

2.50

0

-D I & II

I & II

1

2 2

3

44

T°

R°

I°

PORT 4 4

-P1

& 3

1 &

3

-D 1 1

-TPO

RT 2 2

-P1

& 3

1 &

3

-D 1 1

STAN

DARD

-M ALL

ALL

-P ALL

ALL

-AST

ANDA

RDST

ANDA

RD

-B I & II

N/A

-E ALL

ALL


IMPERIAL


3C


ZA M

AX

F

H

ZA M

AX

NB+.

025

-.000

DIA

GY

+ (T

° x Z

)A

+ (T

° x B

)

M T

HREA

D4X

EAC

H FR

ONT,

BACK

& B

OTTO

M

E D

4XX

BSP

C/2

C

L

JA

KA S

Q

SPEC

IFIE

D BY

3R2

xxW

HEN

ORDE

RING

STA

Q

OU

PA

W K

EYW

AY

V DI

A

R

SHAF

T KE

YWAY

: SH

OWN

AT M

ID-R

OTAT

ION

PORT

POS

ITIO

NS: I

NDIC

ATED

BY

CIRC

LED

NUM

BERS

CUSH

IONS

:SER

IES

2000

ACT

UATO

RS:

ADD

13.0

mm

TO

RESP

ECTI

VE “

A” A

ND “

Y” D

IMEN

SION

FOR

EAC

H CU

SHIO

NM

TG. H

OLES

: CEN

TERE

D ON

CEN

TERL

INE

OF A

CTUA

TOR

BODY

STOP

TUB

ES: L

OCAT

ED IN

TUB

ES I

& II

PLUM

BING

SCH

EMAT

IC: L

0CAT

ED IN

ENG

INEE

RING

DAT

A SE

CTIO

N

III

III

IV

QUIC

K RE

FERE

NCE

FOR:

A +

(T° x

B)

LETT

ER D

IMEN

SION

A 145

201

292

302

B 0.44

0.66

0.66

1.32

C 76 108

127

203

D 51 76 102

127

E38

.150

.863

.576

.2

F 6 9 10 12

G 13 17 19 27

H 0 6 5 11

JA 19 29 29 48

KA 35 48 57 89

L 36 53 58 92

O 50.8

76.2

76.2

127.

0

PA 22 48 48 89

Q 50.8

76.2

88.9

127.

0

R 13 16 19 38

S 6 13 13 32

TA 38.1

50.8

50.8

63.5

U 8 14 10 19

XG1

/8G1

/4G1

/4G3

/8

Y 72 100

116

154

Z0.

220.

330.

330.

66

ZA 29 38 48 73

MM

6 x

1.0

x 8

M8

x 1.

0 x

13M

10 x

1.5

x 1

6M

20 x

2.5

x 3

2

4516

4.6

230.

526

1.5

368.

3

9018

4.5

260.

229

1.1

427.

7

180

224.

231

9.8

410.

853

9.6

270

264.

137

9.1

350.

754

6.6

360

303.

843

8.6

469.

578

4.4

450

343.

649

8.0

529.

090

3.2

NB28

.58

x1.

4 DP

50.8

0 x

1.0

DP55

.00

x 1.

3 DP

85.0

0 x

3.0

DP

V12

.69/

12.7

122

.22/

22.2

328

.55/

28.5

844

.42/

44.4

5

W3.

15 x

1.5

9 x

164.

75 x

2.3

6 x

386.

35 x

3.1

8 x

389.

53 x

2.3

6 x

78

V12

.00/

11.9

722

.00/

21.9

628

.00/

27.9

644

.00/

43.9

6

W4

x 2.

5 x

156

x 3.

5 x

328

x 5

x 40

12 x

5 x

56

C1 A

C 2 E

ACTU

ATOR

TYPE

3R1x

A &

3R2

xA3R

1xH

& 3

R2xH

III

I

POR

TS P

RES

SUR

IZED

C1 &

C2

II

LETT

ER O

PTIO

NRE

FERE

NCED

BY

TUBE

NUM

BER

PORT

& N

EEDL

E LO

CATI

ONS

REFE

RENC

ED B

Y CI

RCLE

D NU

MBE

RS

OPTI

ON L

OCAT

ION

REFE

RENC

E

PORT

PRE

SSUR

IZED

- E

FULL

CCW

POS

ITIO

NPO

RT P

RESS

URIZ

ED -

AFU

LL C

W P

OSIT

ION

-D I & II

I & II

DEGR

EE O

F RO

TATI

ON

SERI

ES20

0040

0060

0080

00

SERI

ES20

0040

0060

0080

001

2 2

3

44

T°

R°

I°

PORT 4 4

-P1

& 3

1 &

3

-D 1 1

-TPO

RT 2 2

-P1

& 3

1 &

3

-D 1 1

STAN

DARD

-M ALL

ALL

-P ALL

ALL

-AST

ANDA

RDST

ANDA

RD

-B I & II

N/A

-E ALL

ALL

IMPE

RIAL

SHA

FTS*

MET

RIC

SHAF

TS*

* B

OTH

IMPE

RIAL

AND

MET

RIC

SHAF

T OP

TION

S AV

AILA

BLE

ON M

ETRI

C BO

DY

(IM

PERI

AL S

HAFT

= D

ESIG

N 5,

AND

MET

RIC

SHAF

T =

DESI

GN 6

).

NUM

BERS

FOR

MET

RIC

UNIT

S AN

D AR

E IN

mm

.

METRIC



3C



ZA M

AX

F

HNB

+.00

1-.0

00DI

AG

YB +

(T° x

Z)

Y +

(T° x

Z)

M T

HREA

D4X

EAC

H FR

ONT,

BACK

& B

OTTO

M

E D

6X X

NPT

C/2

C

L

JA

KA S

QSP

ECIF

IED

BY 4

R21x

WHE

N OR

DERI

NG

STA

Q

OU

PA

W K

EYW

AY

V DI

A

R

FA GA

YA +

Z (T

° + J

°)

F

HG

YA +

Z (T

° + K

°)

V VI

SHAF

T KE

YWAY

: SH

OWN

AT M

ID-R

OTAT

ION

PORT

POS

ITIO

NS: I

NDIC

ATED

BY

CIRC

LED

NUM

BERS

MTG

. HOL

ES: C

ENTE

RED

ON C

ENTE

RLIN

E OF

ACT

UATO

R BO

DYST

OP T

UBES

: LOC

ATED

IN T

UBES

I &

IIPL

UMBI

NG S

CHEM

ATIC

: L0C

ATED

IN E

NGIN

EERI

NG D

ATA

SECT

ION

III

III

IV

LETT

ER D

IMEN

SION

-D 1 &

31

& 3

ACTU

ATOR

TYPE

4R11

A &

4R2

1A4R

11H

& 4

R21H

LETT

ER O

PTIO

NRE

FERE

NCED

BY

TUBE

NUM

BER

PORT

& N

EEDL

E LO

CATI

ONS

REFE

RENC

ED B

Y CI

RCLE

D NU

MBE

RS

OPTI

ON L

OCAT

ION

REFE

RENC

E

-DII

& IV

II &

IV

C1 A

C2 E

D1

D2

SERI

ES40

0060

0080

00

C4.

250

5.00

08.

000

D3.

000

4.00

05.

000

E2.

000

2.50

03.

000

F.3

44.3

75.4

69

G .688

.750

1.06

2

GA .719

.719

1.06

2

H .250

.203

.437

JA1.

156

1.15

61.

875

KA 1.87

52.

250

3.50

0

L2.

094

2.28

13.

625

FA .375

.344

.469

M5/

16-1

8 x

.500

DP

3/8-

16 x

.625

DP

3/4-

10 x

1.2

50 D

P

PA 1.87

51.

875

3.50

0

Q3.

000

3.50

05.

000

R .625

.750

1.50

0

S .500

.500

1.25

0

TA2.

000

2.00

02.

500

U .562

.375

.750

V.8

748/

.875

31.

124/

1.12

51.

749/

1.75

0

W3/

16 x

3/3

2 x

1.50

01/

4 x

1/8

x 1.

500

3/8

x 3/

16 x

3.0

00

X 1/4

1/4

3/8

Y3.

953

4.56

36.

080

YA 6.72

17.

325

9.86

5

YB 3.36

03.

980

5.23

6

ZA 1.50

01.

875

2.87

5

Z.0

13.0

13.0

26

IV

III

II

I

PORT

S PR

ESSU

RIZE

DC 1

& C

2 PORT

S PR

ESSU

RIZE

D –

AFU

LL C

W P

OSIT

ION

PORT

S PR

ESSU

RIZE

DD1

& D

2

PORT

S PR

ESSU

RIZE

D –

EFU

LL C

CW P

OSIT

ION

PORT 4 4

-P1

& 3

1 &

3

-D 1 &

31

& 3

-TPO

RT 2 2

-P1

& 3

1 &

3

STAN

DARD

-M ALL

ALL

-P ALL

ALL

-AST

ANDA

RDST

ANDA

RD

-BII

& IV

N/A

-E ALL

ALL

1

2 2

3

44

NB2.

000

x .0

392.

1654

x .0

523.

3465

x .1

20

O3.

000

3.00

05.

000

T° K° I°R°

J°


IMPERIAL


3C


METRIC

DIMENSIONS: 4 POSITION ROTARY ACTUATORSZA

MAX

F

HNB

+.02

5-.0

00DI

AG

YB +

(T° x

Z)

Y +

(T° x

Z)

M T

HREA

D4X

EAC

H FR

ONT,

BACK

& B

OTTO

M

E D

6X X

BSP

C/2

C

L

JA

KA S

QSP

ECIF

IED

BY 4

R2xx

WHE

N OR

DERI

NG

STA

Q

OU

PA

W K

EYW

AY

V DI

A

R

FA GA

YA +

Z (T

° + J

°)

F

HG

YA +

Z (T

° + K

°)

V VI

SHAF

T KE

YWAY

: SH

OWN

AT M

ID-R

OTAT

ION

PORT

POS

ITIO

NS: I

NDIC

ATED

BY

CIRC

LED

NUM

BERS

MTG

. HOL

ES: C

ENTE

RED

ON C

ENTE

RLIN

E OF

ACT

UATO

R BO

DYST

OP T

UBES

: LOC

ATED

IN T

UBES

I &

IIPL

UMBI

NG S

CHEM

ATIC

: L0C

ATED

IN E

NGIN

EERI

NG D

ATA

SECT

ION

III

III

IV

LETT

ER D

IMEN

SION

C 108

127

203

D 76 102

127

E50

.863

.576

.2

F 9 10 12

G 17 19 27

H 6 5 11

JA 29 29 48

KA 48 57 89

L 53 58 92

O 76.2

76.2

127.

0

PA 48 48 89

Q 76.2

88.9

127.

0

R 16 19 38

S 13 13 32

TA 50.8

50.8

63.5

XG1

/4G1

/4G3

/8

Y 102

118

126

Z0.

330.

330.

66

ZA 38 48 73

MM

8 x

1.25

x 1

3M

10 x

1.5

x 1

6M

20 x

2.5

x 3

2

FA 10 9 12

GA 18 18 27

U 14 10 19

YA 171

186

251

YB 85 101

133

NB50

.80

x 1.

0 DP

55.0

0 x

1.3

DP85

.00

x 3.

0 DP

V22

.22/

22.2

328

.55/

28.5

844

.42/

44.4

5

W4.

75 x

2.3

6 x

386.

35 x

3.1

8 x

389.

53 x

2.3

6 x

78

V22

.00/

21.9

628

.00/

27.9

644

.00/

43.9

6

W6

x 3.

5 x

328

x 5

x 40

12 x

5 x

56

-D 1 &

31

& 3

ACTU

ATOR

TYPE

4R1x

A &

4R2

xA4R

15xH

& 4

R2xH

LETT

ER O

PTIO

NRE

FERE

NCED

BY

TUBE

NUM

BER

PORT

& N

EEDL

E LO

CATI

ONS

REFE

RENC

ED B

Y CI

RCLE

D NU

MBE

RS

OPTI

ON L

OCAT

ION

REFE

RENC

E

-DII

& IV

II &

IV

C1 A

C2 E

D1

D2

IV

III

II

I

PORT

S PR

ESSU

RIZE

DC1

& C

2 PORT

S PR

ESSU

RIZE

D –

AFU

LL C

W P

OSIT

ION

PORT

S PR

ESSU

RIZE

DD1

& D

2

PORT

S PR

ESSU

RIZE

D –

EFU

LL C

CW P

OSIT

ION

PORT 4 4

-P1

& 3

1 &

3

-D 1 &

31

& 3

-TPO

RT 2 2

-P1

& 3

1 &

3

STAN

DARD

SERI

ES40

0060

0080

00

-M ALL

ALL

-P ALL

ALL

-AST

ANDA

RDST

ANDA

RD

-BII

& IV

N/A

-E ALL

ALL

1

2 2

3

44

T° K° I°R°

J°

IMPE

RIAL

SHA

FTS*

MET

RIC

SHAF

TS*

* BO

TH IM

PERI

AL A

ND M

ETRI

C SH

AFT

OPTI

ONS

AVAI

LABL

E ON

MET

RIC

BODY

(IM

PERI

AL S

HAFT

= D

ESIG

N 5,

AND

MET

RIC

SHAF

T =

DESI

GN 6

).

NUM

BERS

FOR

MET

RIC

UNIT

S AN

D AR

E IN

mm

.


3C



SPEC

IFIE

D BY

5R21

x W

HEN

ORDE

RING

STA

Q

OU

PA

W K

EYW

AY

V DI

A

R

ZA M

AX

FH

NB+.

001

-.000

DIA

GYB

+ (T

° x Z

)

M T

HREA

D4X

EAC

H FR

ONT,

BACK

& B

OTTO

M

E D

8XX

NPT

C/2

C

L

JA

KA S

Q

FA GA

YA +

Z (T

° + J

°)

F

HG

YA +

Z (T

° + K

°)

V

VI

ZA M

AXYB

+ (T

° x Z

)YA

+ Z

(T° +

N°)

B2

B1

YA +

Z (T

° x P

°)

GA

FA

SHAF

T KE

YWAY

: SHO

WN

AT M

ID-R

OTAT

ION

PORT

POS

ITIO

NS: I

NDIC

ATED

BY

CIRC

LED

NUM

BERS

MTG

. HOL

ES: C

ENTE

RED

ON C

ENTE

RLIN

E OF

ACT

UATO

R BO

DYST

OP T

UBES

: LOC

ATED

IN T

UBES

I &

IIPL

UMBI

NG S

CHEM

ATIC

: L0C

ATED

IN E

NGIN

EERI

NG D

ATA

SECT

ION

NB2.

000

x .0

39 D

P2.

1654

x .0

52 D

P3.

3465

x .1

20 D

P

O3.

000

3.00

05.

000

III

III

IVV

III

VII

LETT

ER D

IMEN

SION

1

2 2

3

44

PORT 4 4

-P1

& 3

1 &

3

-D 1 1

-TPO

RT 2 2

-P1

& 3

1 &

3

-D 1 1

STAN

DARD

-M ALL

ALL

-P ALL

ALL

-AST

ANDA

RDST

ANDA

RD

-E ALL

ALL

C1 A

C 2 E

D1

D2

SERI

ES40

0060

0080

00

C4.

250

5.00

08.

000

D3.

000

4.00

05.

000

E2.

000

2.50

03.

000

F.3

44.3

75.4

69

G .688

.750

1.06

2

GA .719

.719

1.06

2

H .250

.203

.437

JA1.

156

1.15

61.

875

KA 1.87

52.

250

3.50

0

L2.

094

2.28

13.

625

M5/

16-1

8 x

.500

DP

3/8-

16 x

.625

DP

3/4-

10 x

1.2

50 D

P

PA 1.87

51.

875

3.50

0

Q3.

000

3.50

05.

000

R .625

.750

1.50

0

S .500

.500

1.25

0

TA 2.00

02.

000

2.50

0

U .562

.375

.750

V.8

748/

.875

31.

124/

1.12

51.

749/

1.75

0

W3/

16 x

3/3

2 x

1.50

01/

4 x

1/8

x 1.

500

3/8

x 3/

16 x

3.0

00

X 1/4

1/4

3/8

YA 6.72

17.

325

9.86

5

YB 3.36

03.

980

5.23

6

ZA 1.50

01.

875

2.87

5

Z.0

13.0

13.0

26

FA .375

.344

.469

ACTU

ATOR

TYPE

5R11

A &

5R2

1A5R

11H

& 5

R21H

LETT

ER O

PTIO

NRE

FERE

NCED

BY

TUBE

NUM

BER

PORT

& N

EEDL

E LO

CATI

ONS

REFE

RENC

ED B

Y CI

RCLE

D NU

MBE

RS

OPTI

ON L

OCAT

ION

REFE

RENC

E

-DVI

I & V

VII &

V

IV

III

II

IV

PORT

PRE

SSUR

IZED

- E

FULL

CCW

POS

ITIO

N

PORT

S PR

ESSU

RIZE

DD1

& D

2

PORT

PRE

SSUR

IZED

- A

FULL

CW

POS

ITIO

N

PORT

S PR

ESSU

RIZE

DB1

& B

2

PORT

S PR

ESSU

RIZE

DC 1

& C

2

T°

P°

I° J°K°

N°R°

-BVI

I & V

N/A


IMPERIAL


3C


METRIC


SPEC

IFIE

D BY

5R2x

x W

HEN

ORDE

RING

STA

Q

OU

PA

W K

EYW

AY

V DI

A

R

ZA M

AX

FH

NB+.

025

-.000

DIA

GYB

+ (T

° x Z

)

M T

HREA

D4X

EAC

H FR

ONT,

BACK

& B

OTTO

M

E D

8XX

BSP

C/2

C

L

JA

KA S

Q

FA GA

YA +

Z (T

° + J

°)

F

HG

YA +

Z (T

° + K

°)

V

VI

ZA M

AXYB

+ (T

° x Z

)YA

+ Z

(T° +

N°)

B2

B1

YA +

Z (T

° x P

°)

GA

FA

SHAF

T KE

YWAY

: SHO

WN

AT M

ID-R

OTAT

ION

PORT

POS

ITIO

NS: I

NDIC

ATED

BY

CIRC

LED

NUM

BERS

MTG

. HOL

ES: C

ENTE

RED

ON C

ENTE

RLIN

E OF

ACT

UATO

R BO

DYST

OP T

UBES

: LOC

ATED

IN T

UBES

I &

IIPL

UMBI

NG S

CHEM

ATIC

: L0C

ATED

IN E

NGIN

EERI

NG D

ATA

SECT

ION

III

III

IVV

III

VII

LETT

ER D

IMEN

SION

C 108

127

203

D 76 102

127

E 50.8

63.5

76.2

F 9 10 12

G 17 19 27

H 6 5 11

JA 29 29 48

KA 48 57 89

L 53 58 92

O 76.2

76.2

127.

0

PA 48 48 89

Q 76.2

88.9

127.

0

R 16 19 38

S 13 13 32

TA 50.8

50.8

63.5

U 14 10 19

XG1

/4G1

/4G3

/8

Z 0.33

0.33

0.66

ZA 38 48 73

MM

8 x

1.25

x 1

3M

10 x

1.5

x 1

6M

20 x

2.5

x 3

2

FA 10 9 12

GA 18 18 27

YA 171

186

251

YB 85 101

133

V22

.22/

22.2

328

.55/

28.5

844

.42/

44.4

5

W4.

75 x

2.3

6 x

386.

35 x

3.1

8 x

389.

53 x

2.3

6 x

78

V22

.00/

21.9

628

.00/

27.9

644

.00/

43.9

6

W6

x 3.

5 x

328

x 5

x 40

12 x

5 x

56

1

2 2

3

44

PORT 4 4

-P1

& 3

1 &

3

-D 1 1

-TPO

RT 2 2

-P1

& 3

1 &

3

-D 1 1

STAN

DARD

-M ALL

ALL

-P ALL

ALL

-AST

ANDA

RDST

ANDA

RD

-E ALL

ALL

C1 A

C2 E

D 1

D2

ACTU

ATOR

TYPE

5R1x

A &

5R2

xA5R

1xH

& 5

R2xH

LETT

ER O

PTIO

NRE

FERE

NCED

BY

TUBE

NUM

BER

PORT

& N

EEDL

E LO

CATI

ONS

REFE

RENC

ED B

Y CI

RCLE

D NU

MBE

RS

OPTI

ON L

OCAT

ION

REFE

RENC

E

-DVI

I & V

VII &

VIV

III

II

IV

PORT

PRE

SSUR

IZED

- E

FULL

CCW

POS

ITIO

N

PORT

S PR

ESSU

RIZE

DD 1

& D

2

PORT

PRE

SSUR

IZED

- A

FULL

CW

POS

ITIO

N

PORT

S PR

ESSU

RIZE

DB 1

& B

2

PORT

S PR

ESSU

RIZE

DC 1

& C

2

T°

P°

I° J°K°

N°R°

-BVI

I & V

N/A

SERI

ES40

0060

0080

00

NB50

.80

x 1.

0 DP

55.0

0 x

1.3

DP85

.00

x 3.

0 DP

IMPE

RIAL

SHA

FTS*

MET

RIC

SHAF

TS*

* BO

TH IM

PERI

AL A

ND M

ETRI

C SH

AFT

OPTI

ONS

AVAI

LABL

E ON

MET

RIC

BODY

(IM

PERI

AL S

HAFT

= D

ESIG

N 5,

AND

MET

RIC

SHAF

T =

DESI

GN 6

).

NUM

BERS

FOR

MET

RIC

UNIT

S AN

D AR

E IN

mm

.


3C


RATINGSAll pneumatic rotary actuators have a maximum pressure rating of

150 psi [10 bar] air. Most hydraulic rotary actuators have a maximumpressure rating of 1500 psi [100 bar]. Except as noted in chart below.*

Minimum factor of safety at maximum rated hydraulic pressure foroutput shaft is 2:1, and for hydraulic chambers is 3:1. Consult PHD forproof pressure data.

BREAKAWAYAll RxxA units will breakway at 20 psi [1.4 bar]. RxxH units will

breakway at 40 psi [2.8 bar]. All tandem RxxR units will breakaway at 40psi [2.8 bar]. 018x air units will breakaway at 20 psi [1.4 bar], 018xtandem units will breakaway at 30 psi [2.1 bar].

TEMPERATURE LIMITS AND FLUIDSRotary Actuator units are equipped with Buna-N piston seals

suitable for use in temperatures ranging from -20° to +180°F[-28° to 82°C] and may be used with air, water, petroleum-basedhydraulic fluid, or fuel oil.

Seals for other fluids or temperature requirements are available, butmust be specified. All Rotary Actuators have teflon back-up rings foruniversal use (except Miniature Rotary Actuators Series 018x).

NOTE: For applications where water-based fluids are used, the unitsmust be modified. Consult PHD for specifications.

LUBRICATIONGear racks and pinion are lubricated at the factory and may never

need lubrication. However, if lubrication should be needed due to adverseconditions, use high grade bearing grease.

NOTE: Port for grease nipple provided in top of actuator body.Lubricate only while ports are pressurized except on 018x75 and 018x50,which have no lube ports.

Approximately 1/2 in3 [8 cm3] of grease is sufficient for any seriesactuator, each 250,000 cycles of 360° duration.

HYD OPTION psi [bar]SERIES *PLAIN -P -D -E OR -M

1000 — — — — — — — —2000 1000 [69] 750 [52] 750 [52] — —3000 — — — — — — — —4000 — — 750 [52] 750 [52] — —5000 — — — — — — 1100 [76]6000 — — 750 [52] 750 [52] 1100 [76]7000 — — — — — — 500 [35]8000 — — 750 [52] 750 [52] 500 [35]

ENGINEERING DATA: SERIES 1000-8000 ROTARY ACTUATORSCONTROLS

Rotary Actuator units are operated by directional valves in the samemanner as air and hydraulic cylinders.

Control of piston speeds is extremely important as inertia force is afunction of rotational speed and distance from load to output shaft center.

ANGLE OF ROTATIONSeries 1000-8000 Rotary Actuators are furnished in 6 stock angles:

45°, 90°, 180°, 270°, 360°, and 450°. Other angles are available asspecified.

Series 018x Miniature Rotary Actuators are all furnished with 180°rotation, but can be adjusted anywhere from 180° to 0°.

TOTAL ROTATIONALTOLERANCES & BACKLASH

**Rotational position from one intermediate position to another(measured at centers of backlash).

NOTE: 3 position and 5 position have 0° backlash at ends of rotation.4 position will have up to stated figure at ends of rotation.

MULTI-POSITION MID-POSITIONTOLERANCES & BACKLASH

*Double rack actuators are available with 0° backlash at ends ofrotation, if -A option is used.

Total rotational tolerance may be on both or either sides of mid-rotation minimum.

SERIES ROTATIONAL TOLERANCE BACKLASH1000 & 2000 -0°, +10° *±30 minutes3000 & 4000 -0°, +10° *±15 minutes5000 & 6000 -0°, +10° *±15 minutes7000 & 8000 -0°, +10° *±7.5 minutes

018x75x -0°, +10° ±1.25 degrees duringrotation, ±0° at end

018x50x -0°, +10° ±2 degrees duringrotation, ±0° at end

SERIES TOLERANCE** BACKLASH2000 ±1° ± 1-1/2°

4000 & 6000 ±1/2° ± 1-1/4°8000 ±1/4° ± 1°

018x752 (3 pos.) Adjustable Adjustable to 0°


3C-30

3C



CAT-03

INPUT PRESSURE psi [bar]40 50 60 70 80 90 100 120 150 250 500 1000 1500

MODEL [2.7] [3.4] [4.1] [4.8] [5.5] [6.2] [6.9] [8.3] [10.3] [17.2] [34.4] [68.9] [103.4]15 19 23 27 31 35 39 47 58 98 196 392 588

[1.7] [2.1] [2.6] [3.0] [3.5] [4.0] [4.4] [5.3] [6.6] [11.1] [22.2] [44.3] [66.5]31 39 47 54 62 70 78 94 117 196 392 784 —

[3.5] [4.4] [5.3] [6.1] [7.1] [8.0] [8.8] [16.6] [13.2] [22.2] [44.3] [88.6] [—]44 55 66 77 88 100 111 133 166 277 555 1110 1665

[4.9] [6.2] [7.4] [8.7] [10.0] [11.3] [12.6] [15.0] [18.8] [31.3] [62.7] [125.5] [188.2]88 111 133 155 177 200 222 266 333 555 1110 2200 3330

[10.0] [12.6] [15.0] [17.5] [20.0] [22.6] [25.1] [30.1] [37.7] [62.7] [125.5] [248.8] [376.5]94 118 141 165 189 212 236 283 354 590 1180 2360 3540

[10.6] [13.3] [15.9] [18.7] [21.4] [23.9] [26.7] [32.0] [4.0] [66.7] [133.4] [266.9] [400.3]189 236 282 330 378 424 472 564 708 1180 2360 4720 7080

[21.4] [26.7] [31.9] [37.3] [42.7] [47.9] [53.4] [63.8] [80.1] [133.4] [266.9] [533.7] [800.6]424 530 635 740 848 950 1060 1270 1590 2650 5300 10600 15900

[47.9] [59.9] [71.8] [83.7] [95.9] [107.4] [179.9] [143.4] [179.8] [299.7] [599.5] [1198.6][1297.4]848 1060 1270 1480 1696 1900 2120 2540 3180 5300 10600 21200 31800

[95.5] [119.9] [143.6] [167.4] [191.8] [214.8] [239.7] [287.2] [359.6] [599.3] [1198.6][2397.3][3595.9]4.4 5.5 6.6 7.7 8.8 9.9 11.0 13.2 16.5 — — — —

[.49] [.62] [.74] [.87] [.99] [1.12] [1.24] [1.49] [1.87] — — — —

8.8 11.0 13.2 15.4 17.6 19.8 22.0 26.4 33.0 — — — —[.99] [1.24] [1.49] [1.74] [1.99] [2.24] [2.48] [2.98] [3.73] — — — —

4.4 5.5 6.6 7.7 8.8 9.9 11.0 13.2 16.5 — — — —[.49] [.62] [.74] [.87] [.99] [1.12] [1.24] [1.49] [1.87] — — — —

4.4 5.5 6.6 7.7 8.8 9.9 11.0 13.2 16.5 — — — —[.49] [.62] [.74] [.87] [.99] [1.12] [1.24] [1.49] [1.87] — — — —

2.6 3.3 3.9 4.6 5.2 5.9 6.5 7.8 9.8 — — — —[.29] [.37] [.44] [.52] [.59] [.66] [.74] [.88] [1.11] — — — —

1000

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

7000

8000

018x751

018075201857520186752

018x75T

018375201887520189752

018x502

ENGINEERING DATA: SERIES 1000-8000 ROTARY ACTUATORS

Use the single rack torques for all Air/Oil Tandem and Multi-Position Rotary Actuators.Torques shown are theoretical. Allow 10% for friction loss. Allow 20% for friction losson all Air/Oil Tandem Rotary Actuators.

THEORETICAL TORQUE OUTPUT in-lb [Nm]

3C-31

3C



CAT-03

ENGINEERING DATA: SERIES 1000-8000 ROTARY ACTUATORS

SERIES 45° 90° 180° 270° 360° 450° PER 90° ADD FOR SHAFT EXT.1000 2.1 [.95] 2.3 [1.04] 2.6 [1.18] 2.9 [1.31] 3.3 [1.49] 3.6 [1.64] .3 [.14] .1 [.04]2000 3.1 [1.40] 3.3 [1.50] 3.9 [1.78] 4.5 [2.09] 5.1 [2.32] 5.7 [2.58] .6 [.28] .1 [.04]3000 7.2 [3.26] 7.5 [3.40] 8.3 [3.76] 9.0 [4.08] 9.8 [4.45] 10.5 [4.76] .8 [.36] .4 [.18]4000 9.6 [4.35] 10.2 [4.62] 11.4 [5.17] 12.6 [5.71] 13.8 [6.26] 15.0 [6.80] 1.2 [.54] .4 [.18]5000 11.5 [5.22] 11.9 [5.42] 12.8 [5.80] 13.5 [6.13] 14.3 [6.49] 15.1 [6.86] .8 [.37] .5 [.27]6000 15.8 [7.7] 16.8 [7.63] 18.3 [8.3] 19.8 [8.99] 21.3 [9.67] 22.8 [10.35] 1.5 [.68] .5 [.27]

7000 Air 37.9 [17.19] 39.1 [12.25] 41.7 [18.91] 44.2 [20.05] 46.8 [21.20] 49.4 [22.43] 2.6 [1.19] 2.4 [1.08]7000 Hyd. 39.1 [17.75] 41.0 [18.60] 44.8 [20.32] 48.5 [22.00] 52.3 [23.71] 56.0 [25.41] 3.8 [1.72] 2.4 [1.08]8000 Air 49.6 [22.52] 52.1 [23.65] 57.4 [26.03] 62.6 [28.41] 67.9 [30.80] 73.1 [33.18] 5.3 [2.40] 2.4 [1.08]

8000 Hyd. 52.1 [23.65] 55.9 [25.35] 63.4 [28.75] 70.9 [32.16] 78.4 [35.56] 85.9 [38.96] 7.5 [3.40] 2.4 [1.08]

*Ambient Temperature 87°F [30°C] Standard Oil No. 15Reservoir Pressure = 20 psi [1.3 bar]Speed decreases with increase in reservoir pressure.

AIR/OIL TANDEM MAXIMUM SPEEDS (NO LOAD CONDITION)

MINIATURE ROTARY ACTUATORS WEIGHTS lb [kg]

WEIGHT TABLES lb [kg] SINGLE SHAFT EXTENSION ACTUATORS

PHYSICAL DATA

SERIES018x751 018x752 018x75T 0183752, 0188752, & 0189752 018x502

2.1 [.95] 2.6 [1.18] 2.6 [1.18] 3.1 [1.41] .8 [.36]

OPERATING OIL MAX. SPEED OPERATING OIL MAX. SPEEDSERIES PRESSURE psi [bar] TEMPERATURE* (DEGREES/SEC) SERIES PRESSURE psi [bar] TEMPERATURE* (DEGREES/SEC)

50 [3.4] 270 50 [3.4] 156

200060 [4.1] 95°F 294

600060 [4.1] 105°F 180

70 [4.8] [35°C] 336 70 [4.8] [40.5°C] 21080 [5.5] 366 80 [5.5] 21650 [3.4] 258 50 [3.4] 132

400060 [4.1] 95°F 288

800060 [4.1] 135°F 144

70 [4.8] [35°C] 324 70 [4.8] [57.2°C] 15080 [5.5] 348 80 [5.5] 156

OPERATING OIL SECONDS/MODEL PRESSURE psi [bar] TEMPERATURE* 180° ROTATION

50 [3.4] .31

018x75T60 [4.1] 95°F .2770 [4.8] [35°C] .2580 [5.5] .22

GEAR DISPLACEMENT AXIAL BEARING RADIAL BEARING DISTANCE BETWEEN PISTONSERIES RACKS in3 [cm3]/DEG. ROT. LOAD CAPACITY lb [N]* LOAD CAPACITY lb [N]* SHAFT BEARINGS in [mm] DIAMETER in [mm]1000 1 .007 [.115] 50 [222] 100 [444] 1.375 [34.9] 1 [25.4]2000 2 .014 [.229]3000 1 .019 [.312] 125 [556] 250 [1112] 2.188 [55.6] 1-3/8 [35]4000 2 .038 [.623]5000 1 .041 [.672] 200 [890] 400 [1779] 2.235 [56.8] 2 [50]6000 2 .082 [13.44]7000 1 .185 [3.032] 500 [2224] 1000 [4448] 3.750 [95.3] 3 [76]8000 2 .370 [6.064]

018x751 1 .002 [0.032] 15 [67] 25 [111] 1.060 [26.9] 3/4 [19]018x752 2 .004 [0.064]018x75T 2 .002 [0.032] 15 [67] 25 [111] 1.060 [26.9] 3/4 [19]018x502 2 .0012 [0.020] 5 [22] 15 [22] .916 [23.3] 1/2 [13]

* Always support rotating member on external bearings whenever possible.

3C-32

3C



CAT-03

PLUMBING SCHEMATICS: ROTARY ACTUATORS

C2

E

C1

A

S2 S1 S3

I

T°

I° R°

II

III

PORTS PRESSURIZEDC1 & C2

PORT PRESSURIZED - EFULL CCW POSITION

PORT PRESSURIZED - AFULL CW POSITION

I

T°

J° K°

II

III

PORTS PRESSURIZEDD1 & D2


PORT PRESSURIZED - C2FULL CW POSITION

D1

D2

S2 S1 S3

E

C2

3 POSITION UNITSSERIES 2000-8000

3 POSITION TANDEM UNITSSERIES 2000-8000

3C-33

3C



CAT-03

PLUMBING SCHEMATICS: ROTARY ACTUATORS

I

II III


PORT PRESSURIZED - AFULL CW POSITION

J° I°R°

K°

IV

T°PORTS PRESSURIZED

D1 & D2PORTS PRESSURIZEDC1 & C2

A

S3 S2 S1

E

C2

S4

C1D1

D2

T°III

PORTS PRESSURIZEDC1 & C2

A

S3

S2 S1

E

C2

S5

B1D1

D2

S4

C1

B2

I

II IV


PORT PRESSURIZED - AFULL CW POSITIONV

PORTS PRESSURIZEDD1 & D2

PORTS PRESSURIZEDB1 & B2

I°

J°

R°

K°

P°

N°



3C-34

3C



CAT-03

START-UP PROCEDURE: SERIES 1000-8000 ACTUATORSROTARY ACTUATORS

CAUTION: Angular velocity and deceleration of actuators arenormally controlled with Port Control® valves and cushions.

At start-up, the actuator cylinders are often empty or notpressurized. To prevent damage due to lack of governing mediaand to assure a controlled start-up, the following procedure shouldbe used.

1. After installation of actuator and auxiliary tooling (arms, jaws,fixtures, etc.), manually turn output shaft fully clockwise priorto start up. Actuator should be started-up with typical workpiece or load.

2. Apply pressure to rotary chamber in same direction as shaft isturned (clockwise port).

3. Apply pressure to opposite port and slowly open speed controlvalve governing counterclockwise direction. This will allow theactuator to rotate under control. Follow the same procedure inopposite direction. Several cycles may be needed to obtainproper speed adjustment.

4. On units with adjustable cushions, set needle adjustment foroptimum effectiveness to minimize shock at end of rotation.

AIR/OIL TANDEM ROTARY ACTUATORS1. Mount Reservoir “A” vertically above actuator hydraulic

section. (Approximately 12 feet [3.6 m] of flexible tubing hasbeen provided to allow reservoir to be mounted in convenientlocation.) Excess may be coiled up or cut off. Shortening oftube should take place by disconnecting tube from tank takingcare that minimum amount is allowed to drain from reservoirand that tube is kept full of oil at all times. A small air bubblemay form at end of tube when reassembled. This is notdetrimental and will disappear during operation of actuator.

2. Provide constant air supply regulated to 20 psi [1.3 bar] toport B on reservoir.

3. Apply air pressure to reservoir. Next, LOOSEN (do not remove)drain plug C. Allow oil to drain until level reaches line E.Retighten plug securely.

4. If actuator is equipped with cushions, open needle valvesmarked D approximately 1/8 turn.

5. Follow same procedure with port control needles marked P.

6. Air pressure may now be applied to actuator. Take care to keepclear from any tooling attached to the actuator shaft as it maystart rotating.

7. Adjust control needles to achieve proper velocities (anddecelerations).

8. Bleed plug G must not be loosened or removed as actuator willlose oil charge.

REGULATOR 20 psi [1.3 bar]

B

E

A

F

C

G

CAUTION:PLEASE DO NOT TAMPER WITH FITTING ASSEMBLY.CONTAINS CHECK VALVE WITH LOOSE COMPONENTS.

D

D

P

MAINTENANCE VIDEOSField Maintenance Videos on filling and bleeding Air/Oil

Tandem Actuators are now available. Contact your local PHDdistributor or call our toll free number: 1-800-624-8511.

3C-35

3C



CAT-03

OPTIONS: SERIES 1000-8000 ROTARY ACTUATORS

P PORT CONTROL®

The “built-in” speed control valve.The exclusive PHD Port Control®, based on the “meter-out”

principle, features an adjustable needle and a separate ball check.Both are built into the rotary actuator end cap and are used tocontrol the speed of the actuator over its entire rotation.

D ADJUSTABLE CUSHIONS

PHD Cushions are designed for smooth deceleration at the endof rotation. When the cushion is activated, the remaining volume inthe cylinder must exhaust past an adjustable needle which controlsthe amount of deceleration. Effective cushion length isapproximately 30° of rotation, except on the 8000 Tandem whichhas 20° of cushion length.

Cushions on Series 2000, 4000, 6000 and 8000 are furnishedon one of two racks only.

Fits all PHD Series 1000-8000, except when ordering hollowshafts. Isolates internal or external pressures. Maximum pressuredifferential is 500 psi [34.4 bar]. Furnished installed on actuator only(both sides). Covers are made of hard anodized aluminum. Not to beused as a pilot.

G SHAFT SEAL COVERSNot available on Rx6x and Rx9x models

SHOCK PADS

Polyurethane pads for absorption of shock and noise areavailable on each end of Series 1000-8000 Rotary Actuators.Reducing shock permits higher piston velocities for shorter cycletimes. Reducing noise levels provides improved environment forincreased productivity. Pads eliminate metal-to-metal contactbetween piston and end caps. NOTE: Air application only.

B

Adjusting screw(s) for reducing angle of rotation in either orboth directions for use where exact degree of desired rotationcannot be predetermined or where requirements may vary duringoperation. Standard adjusting screw will reduce angle of rotation upto 30°. Available in conjunction with all other optional features.

Cushions are normally engaged over the last 30° of angle. Theuse of angle adjusting screws to reduce angle of rotation has adirect effect on the length of cushion engagement. Example: 10°angle reduction will reduce cushion engagement by 10°. Angleadjustments are standard on all Multi-Position Rotary Actuators.

A ANGLE ADJUSTMENTZA MAX

ZD DIA

HZB ZC

H0.00[0]

.250[6]

.203[5]

.437[11]

ZA1.125[29]

1.500[38]

1.875[48]

2.875[73]

ZB.312[8]

.375[10].750[19].937[24]

ZC3/16 HEX

—1/4 HEX

— 1/4 HEX

—3/4 FLAT[19 mm]

ZD.875[22]

1.250[32]

1.250[32]

1.750[45]

SERIESLETTER DIMENSION

1000 & 2000

3000 & 4000

5000 & 6000

7000 & 8000

A DIA

.187+.000-.010

B REF

+.000-.254 A

1.875[47.63]3.000

[76.20]3.250

[82.55]4.480

[113.79]

B.688

[17.5]1.688[42.9]1.688[42.9]3.312[84.1]

SERIESLETTER

1000 & 2000

3000 & 4000

5000 & 6000

7000 & 8000

The self-locking needle has micrometer threads and isadjustable under pressure. It determines the orifice size whichcontrols the exhaust volume only of the actuator proper. Theseparate ball check is closed while fluid is exhausting from theactuator, but opens to permit full flow of incoming fluids. The PHDPort Control® provides the optimum in speed control for rotaryactuators. It saves space and eliminates the cost of fittings andinstallation for external flow control valves.


NUMBERS IN [ ] ARE FOR METRIC UNITS AND ARE IN mm.

NUMBERS IN [ ] ARE FOR METRICUNITS AND ARE IN mm.

3C-36

3C



CAT-03

OPTIONS: SERIES 1000-8000 ROTARY ACTUATORSBASIC SHAFT DIMENSIONS: R1xx and R2xx

H HOLLOW SHAFTNot available on Rx6x and Rx9x models

C CROSS KEY SHAFTNot available on Rx6x and Rx9x models

K PRELOADED KEYWAY SHAFTNot available on Rx6x and Rx9x models

V WIMPERIAL* METRIC**

V WSERIES

1000 & 2000

3000 & 4000

5000 & 6000

7000 & 8000

LETTER DIMENSION

NOTES:

V DIA

W KEYWAY

PAPA

V DIA

W KEYWAY

DOUBLE SHAFT EXTENSION(FRONT & BACK OF UNIT)

R2xx: R1xx:SINGLE SHAFT EXTENSION

(FRONT OF UNIT)

PA.875[22]

1.875[48]

1.875[48]

3.500[89]

.4998/.5003[12.69/12.71].8748/.8753

[22.22/22.23]1.124/1.125

[28.55/28.58]1.749/1.750

[44.42/44.45]

1/8 x 1/16 x .625[3.18 x 1.56 x 16]

3/16 x 3/32 x 1.500[4.75 x 2.36 x 38]1/4 x 1/8 x 1.500[6.35 x 3.18 x 38]3/8 x 3/16 x 3.000[9.53 x 2.36 x 76]

—[12.00/11.97]

—[22.00/21.96]

—[28.00/27.96]

—[44.00/43.96]

—[4 x 2.5 x 15]

—[6 x 3.5 x 32]

—[8 x 5 x 40]

—[12 x 5 x 56]

1) SHAFT KEYWAY: SHOWN AT MID-ROTATION2) *IMPERIAL SHAFT UNITS (Rx1x, Rx3x, Rx5x. Rx8x)3) **METRIC SHAFT UNITS (Rx6x, Rx9R)

4 2

1

3

A.125[3.2]

F RAD

B MIN DIAALLOWABLE

D THREAD

E THREAD

F

+.010-.000C +.254

-.000

A .375[9.5] .812[20.6] .812[20.6]1.500[38.1]

B1.500[38.1]2.000[50.8]3.000[76.2]4.000

[101.6]

C.250

[6.35].437

[11.11].563

[14.28].875

[22.22]

D3/8-24[M10]1/2-20[M12]5/8-11[M16]

1-8[M24]

E10-32 x .312 DP

[M5 x 8]5/16-24 x .440 DP

[M8 x 11]3/8-24 x .560 DP

[M10 x 14]1/2-20 x .687 DP

[M12 x 17.5]

F.156[4]

.220[6]

.251[6]

.438[11]

SERIES

1000 & 2000

3000 & 4000

5000 & 6000

7000 & 8000

LETTER DIMENSION

SHAFT KEYWAY: SHOWN AT MID-ROTATIONR2xx UNITS: WHEN ORDERING SPECIFY -K-K FOR PRELOAD ON BOTH SHAFT EXTENSIONS. PRELOAD

WILL BE ON OPPOSITE SIDES OF SHAFT.SET SCREW: INCLUDED WITH UNIT

A .250[6.4].250[6.4].437[11].437[11]

B.215[5.5].265[6.7].485

[12.3].805

[20.4]

C.230[5.8].248[6.3].500

[12.7].875

[22.2]

D .500[12.7].875

[22.2]1.125[28.6]1.750[44.5]

E.118[3]

.120[3]

.150[3.8].245[6.2]

F .250[6.3].248[6.3].5002[12.7].8752[22.2]

SERIES

1000 & 2000

3000 & 4000

5000 & 6000

7000 & 8000

LETTER DIMENSION

+.001-.000C

BOTH ENDSD DIA

ABOTH ENDS

B

F SLOT WIDTHA SLOT DEPTHE

SHAFT KEYWAY: SHOWN AT MID-ROTATIONR2xx UNITS: WHEN ORDERING SPECIFY -C-C FOR

CROSSKEY ON BOTH SHAFT EXTENSIONSCROSSKEY: INCLUDED WITH UNIT

+.025-.000

WA KEYWAYTHRU

PB AA

VA DIA THRU+.050-.000

+.002-.000

A .042[1.1].042[1.1].135[3.4].240[6.1]

PB1.920

[48.76]2.917

[74.09]2.730

[69.34]4.520

[114.80]

VA.250

[6.35] .500[12.7].687

[17.46]1.125

[28.57]

WA——

1/8 x 1/16[3.18 x 1.58] 3/16 x 3/32[4.76 x 2.38]

1/4 x 1/8[6.35 x 2.38]

SERIES

1000 & 2000

3000 & 4000

5000 & 6000

7000 & 8000

LETTER DIMENSION

SHAFT KEYWAY: SHOWN AT MID-ROTATION

For use with Hub Adaptors. See Transition Plates & Stanchionssection.


3C-37

3C



CAT-03

MAGNETIC PISTON FOR USE WITHPHD PROXIMITY SWITCHES


The PHD Magnetic Reed Switches may be used in situationswhere the Hall Effect Switches are not applicable. As with the HallEffect Switches, a magnetic band (specify -M) on the pistonsactivates the externally mounted PHD Reed Switches. The ReedSwitches may be used to signal a programmable controller,sequencer, relay, or in some cases, a valve solenoid. This option isfor use with the following switches.

Series 1000-8000 Rotary Actuators may be equipped with amagnetic band (specify -E) on the pistons which activates externallymounted PHD Hall Effect Switches. These switches allow theinterfacing of the PHD Actuators to various logic systems. Thisoption is for use with the following switches.

E HALL EFFECT SWITCHES M REED SWITCHES

SET POINT MODULEPART NO. DESCRIPTION

9800-01-0300 NPN (Sink) 4.5-24 VDC9800-01-0400 PNP (Source) 4.5-24 VDC

See Switches and Sensors section for information.

See page 3C-29 for Hydraulic Pressure Ratings with these options.See each ordering data for magnetic piston ordering information.Switches and brackets must be ordered separately.See Switches and Sensors section for complete switch information.

PHD offers a solid state sensor transducer along with aSet Point Module which provides up to four adjustable sensingpositions throughout the 180° maximum sensing range. Thesesignals can be used as inputs to a programmable controller to signalends of rotation in addition to multiple signals during rotation forindication of arc travelled.

The Set Point Module allows independent adjustment of eachsensing position and is available for 4.5 to 24 VDC current sinkingor current sourcing.

To order, specify -J option on Series 1000-8000 and -3 in theappropriate option space for 018x50x and 018x75x.

J SENSOR/SET POINT MODULENot available on Rx6x and Rx9x models

SWITCH BRACKETS

COMPACT HALL EFFECT SWITCHESPART NO. COLOR DESCRIPTION

17503-2-06 Yellow NPN (Sink) Type 4.5-24 VDC, 6 foot cable17504-2-06 Red PNP (Source) Type 4.5-24 VDC, 6 foot cable17523-2 Yellow NPN (Sink) Type 4.5-24 VDC, Quick Connect17524-2 Red PNP (Source) Type 4.5-24 VDC, Quick Connect

LIQUID RESISTANT HALL EFFECT SWITCH PART NO. DESCRIPTION 15902-1 NPN (Sink) or PNP (Source) 4.5-24 VDC

PART NO.SERIES COMPACT SWITCH LIQUID RESISTANT

1000 & 2000 17000-32-5 5142-32-33000 & 4000 17000-34-5 5142-34-35000 & 6000 17000-38-0 5142-38-37000 & 8000 17000-39-0 5142-39-3

COMPACT REED SWITCHESPART NO. DESCRIPTION17502-2-06 White NPN (Sink) or PNP (Source) 4.5-24 VDC,

6 foot cable17509-3-06 Green AC Type 110-120 VAC with Current Limit,

6 foot cable17522-2 White NPN (Sink) or PNP (Source) 4.5-24 VDC,

Quick Connect17529-3 Green AC Type 110-120 VAC, Quick Connect

with Current Limit

LIQUID RESISTANT REED SWITCHESPART NO. DESCRIPTION15900-1 10 Watt 4.5-24 VDC or 110-120 VAC15901-1 3 Amp 65-120 VAC

3C-38

3C



CAT-03


LCOUNTERCLOCKWISEUNIDIRECTIONAL CLUTCHNot available on Rx6x and Rx9x modelsOutput hub will only rotate in counterclockwisedirection at specific rotation ordered.

RCLOCKWISE UNIDIRECTIONALCLUTCHNot available on Rx6x and Rx9x modelsOutput hub will only rotate in clockwisedirection at specific rotation ordered.

Overrun clutch for intermittent unidirectional shaft output,available for Series 1000 through 6000.

Output hub rotates in one direction only. It remains motionlesswhile rack and pinion reverse. Clutch repeats within ±1/2°.

Assembly features a Torrington roller clutch. Spring loadedbrake shoes limit output shaft free wheeling, but are not intended forstopping external loads.

CAUTION: Any angular error will accumulate; therefore, shotpins or similar locators are necessary on index applications.Maintain shot pin location during reversal of Rotary Actuator toguarantee that clutch shaft does not move due to external forces orslight internal friction in clutch.

1.656[42]

ABOVE INLET PRESSURES PROVIDE A MAXIMUM TORQUEOF 414 in-lb [46.8 Nm] ALLOWED BY THE CLUTCH

A .281[7.2].344[8.7].406

[10.3]

C2.938[74.6]4.188

[106.3]4.938

[125.4]

D2.000[51]

3.000[76]

4.000[102]

E1.500[38]

2.000[50.8]2.500[63.5]

Q2.000[50.8]3.000[76.2]3.500[88.9]

MAX. INLETPRESSURE(psi)[bar]

MAX. RADIAL ORAXIAL LOAD (lb) [N]

SERIESLETTER DIMENSION

SERIES100020003000400050006000

LIMITING FACTORS

1000 & 2000

3000 & 4000

5000 & 6000

105252637218617487

5510101515

[72][36][25][13][12][6]

[22][22][44][44][66][66]

Q

ED

C

2X A DIA THRU TOACTUATOR BODY

.500/.502 [12.70/12.75]DIA x .437 [11.1] DP

.873/.875[22.17/22.22] DIA

1.625 [41] DIA

.125/.126[3.17/3.20]THRU DIA

1.250[31.75]

.187 [4.7]

.375 [9.5]

R2xxAUXILLARYEXTENSION

OUTPUT HUB

RROTATION

LROTATION

4 2

1

3

The PVA functions as a built-in pneumatic limit switch. An airpressure signal is provided at the end-of-piston travel as the pistonseal uncovers an orifice in the block. Upon reversal of piston travel,the pilot pressure is shut off and the pilot line is vented through therotary actuator housing.

Air pilot signal is provided approximately .03 inch [1 mm] priorto end of piston travel (or 10 to 15 degrees prior to end of rotation).For pneumatic use only.

PVA ports are located in position 1 unless otherwise specified.Not available in conjunction with angle adjustment -A option.

N PILOT VALVE ACTUATORNot available on Rx6x and Rx9x models

PVA UNITS WILL REQUIRE A MINIMUMROTATION OF 45°

1000 & 2000

3000 & 4000

5000 & 6000

7000 & 8000

PD

.625 [16] SQ.500 [12.7]MAX

PV TYP

2X 1/8 NPT [BSP]

CCW SIGNAL PORTCW SIGNAL PORT

SERIES PD1.000[25.4]1.500[38.1]1.500[38.1]2.500[63.5]

LETTER DIMENSION

W/-B1.848[46.9]2.410[61.2]2.978[75.6]3.770[95.8]

STANDARD2.191[55.7]2.847[72.3]3.436[87.3]4.409[112]

PV

4 2

1

3


3C-39

3C



CAT-03

KIT NO.IMPERIAL METRIC

13756 1432013757 1432113758 14322

B2.000 [51]3.000 [76]4.000 [102]

C1.625 [41.3]2.375 [60.3]3.375 [85.7]

D 2.625 [66.7]3.875 [98.4]3.875 [98.4]

E.281 [7.1].406 [10.3].406 [10.3]

F .250 [6.3].437 [11.1].437 [11.1]

A4.250 [108]4.500 [114]4.500 [114]

B2.000 [51]3.000 [76]4.000 [102]5.000 [127]

C1.375 [34.9]2.125 [54.0]3.375 [85.7]3.000 [76.2]

D3.625 [92.1]5.125 [130.2]5.875 [149.2]10.000 [254.0]

E.281 [7.1].406 [10.3].406 [10.3].781 [19.8]

F.250 [6.3].437 [11.1].437 [11.1].750 [19.1]

A4.250 [108]5.750 [146]6.500 [165]12.000 [305]

G .625 [15.9]1.000 [25.4]1.250 [31.8]1.875 [47.6]

KIT NO.IMPERIAL METRIC

13759 1431613760 1431713761 1431813762 14319

LETTER DIMENSION

SERIES1000 & 20003000 & 40005000 & 6000

LETTER DIMENSION

SERIES1000 & 20003000 & 40005000 & 60007000 & 8000

F

AD

4X E DIATHRU

CB

F

AD

4X E DIATHRU

CB

G DIA THRU


Needles may not be located in same position as ports. Seepage 3C-16 for needle positions Air/Oil Tandem Actuators. See 3C-4for port and Port Control® positions on Miniature Rotary Actuators.

I II

III IV

12

3

4

12

3

4

1

2

3

4

12

3

4

5

I YThis option positions the ports in position 1 on racks I & II and

in position 3 on racks III and IV. This allows access to the ports onthe “Top” and “Bottom” sides of the actuator.

This option rotates the cap of an Air/Oil Tandem RotaryActuator 180°. This places the Port Control (and Cushion) needlesand the Tandem fitting in position 2. Standard position for these isposition 4.

PORT POSITION 1 TOP RACKPORT POSITION 3 BOTTOM RACK TANDEM CAP ROTATED 180°

V FLUORO-ELASTOMER SEALSFluoro-Elastomer seals are available for service up to 400°F

[204°C]. They may also be used to achieve seal compatibility withcertain fluids. Seal compatibility should be checked with the fluidmanufacturer for proper application.

This option may be specified when a precise rotation isrequired and angle adjustment (see page 3C-35) is not acceptable.By specifying this option, rotation will be within a tolerance of+30, -0 minutes. Standard tolerance is -0°, +10° of rotation.

W CLOSE TOLERANCE ROTATION

Z1 ELECTROLESS NICKEL PLATINGElectroless nickel plating is done on all externally exposed

ferrous parts except the pinion shaft. This optional plating treatmentgives an alternative method of protecting the unit from severeenvironments.

NOTE: Standard plating is Zinc & Black Oxide.

MOUNTING FLANGE (HARDWARE INCLUDED)

SIDE MOUNTING FLANGE

BOTTOM MOUNTING FLANGE

PORT & PORT CONTROL LOCATIONSSTANDARD PORT LOCATION on all Series 1000-8000

Actuators is position 2. STANDARD PVA (-N) LOCATIONS aretubes I & II in position 1. STANDARD PORT CONTROL® ANDCUSHION ADJUSTMENT NEEDLES are located in end caps I & IIin position 1. Other port and adjusting needle locations areavailable as specified.


3C-40

3C



CAT-03

SAE Ports are available on most PHD hydraulic RotaryActuators. The Series 1000 & 2000 Rotary Actuators require a bosswhich is brazed to the caps.

Dimensions for this boss are shown below. Consult PHD foroptional port position or units with Port Controls.


SSAE PORTS FORHYDRAULIC FLUIDNot available on Rx6x and Rx9x models

.625 [15.9] DIA

.650[16.5]

SAE PORT THREADSEE CHART BELOW.039

[1]

PORT BOSS REQUIRED TOEXTEND ABOVE CAP SURFACEON SERIES 1000 & 2000 ONLY

PORTSIZE

7/16 - 20 SAE7/16 - 20 SAE9/16 - 18 SAE3/4 - 16 SAE

SERIES1000 & 20003000 & 40005000 & 60007000 & 8000


3D-1

3D


(800) 624-8511www.phdinc.com/riCAT-03

ROTARY ACTUATORSSERIES RI

INDEX:Ordering Data

Page 3D-2

BenefitsPage 3D-3

DimensionsPages 3D-4 to 3D-9

Engineering DataPages 3D-10 & 3D-11

OptionsPages 3D-12 to 3D-14

AccessoriesPages 3D-15 to 3D-18

Actuator SelectionPages 3D-19 to 3D-22

Sizing ExamplePages 3D-23 to 3D-25

Application ExamplePage 3D-26

Low Profile, High Force

SERIES RIIntegral Air Lines for

Direct Pneumatic Coupling

SERIES RIxHHollow Pinion

3D-2

3D


(800) 624-8511www.phdinc.com/ri CAT-03

TO O

RDER

SPE

CIFY

:Pr

oduc

t, Se

ries,

Typ

e, D

esig

n No

.,Bo

re S

ize, R

otat

ion,

and

Opt

ions

.

NOTE

:1)

Eith

er o

ptio

nal a

ngle

adj

ustm

ents

or s

hock

abs

orbe

rs m

ust b

eor

dere

d on

all

units

. (Ei

ther

opt

ion

is m

anda

tory

.)2)

Switc

hes

and

switc

h br

acke

t kits

mus

t be

orde

red

sepa

rate

ly.

H-

NBD

IR

3

THRE

E PO

SITI

ONUN

ITS

Only

90°

Mid

-pos

ition

on

Doub

le R

ack

Units

are

avai

labl

e.

PROD

UCT

R - R

otar

y

SERI

ESI -

Inte

rnal

Pas

sage

TYPE

DESI

GN N

O.1

- Im

peria

l5

- Met

ric

25PB

ABM

--

SSI

NGLE

RACK D

DOUB

LERA

CK

BORE

Ø25

mm

32 m

m50

mm

25 m

m32

mm

50 m

m

TORQ

UEAT

87

psi

32 in

-lb [3

.6 N

m]

63 in

-lb [7

.1 N

m]

207

in-lb

[23.

4 Nm

]64

in-lb

[7.2

Nm

]12

7 in

-lb [1

4.3

Nm]

414

in-lb

[46.

8 Nm

]

SHOC

K AB

SORB

ERS

NB-S

hock

inst

alle

d bo

th d

irect

ions

NC-S

hock

inst

alle

d co

unte

rclo

ckw

ise

NW-S

hock

inst

alle

d cl

ockw

ise

See

note

1

ROTA

TION

SPE

ED C

ONTR

OL V

ALVE

PB -

Rot

atio

nal S

peed

Con

trols

both

dire

ctio

nsPC

-Ro

tatio

nal S

peed

Con

trols

coun

terc

lock

wis

ePW

- Ro

tatio

nal S

peed

Con

trols

cloc

kwis

e

ANGL

E AD

JUST

MEN

TAB

-An

gle

adju

stm

ent w

ith s

hock

pad

inst

alle

d bo

th e

nds

AC -

Angl

e ad

just

men

t with

sho

ckpa

d in

stal

led

coun

terc

lock

wis

e 90

°AW

-An

gle

adju

stm

ent w

ith s

hock

pad

inst

alle

d cl

ockw

ise

90°

See

note

1

OPTI

ONS

M -

Reed

Mag

net,

Solid

Sta

te

BORE

Ø25

mm

32 m

m50

mm

180

90x

x

ROTA

TION

180°

MID

-POS

ITIO

N90

°On

3-p

ositi

on o

nly

Mus

t be

spec

ified

-

UNIT

SIZE

RISx

x25

RIDx

x25

RISx

x32

RIDx

x32

RISx

x50

RIDx

x50

6914

669

153

6914

769

154

6914

769

156

SHOC

KAB

SORB

ERKI

T NO

.

NOTE

:One

por

t con

trol f

ittin

g pe

r kit

6919

569

198

6919

669

199

6919

669

199

RIxx

125

RIxx

525

RIxx

132

RIxx

532

RIxx

150

RIxx

550

ROTA

TION

SPE

ED C

ONTR

OLKI

T NO

.

1HOLL

OW P

INIO

NH

- Hol

low

Pin

ion

Leav

e bl

ank

if st

anda

rd

RIx1

25RI

x525

RIx1

32RI

x532

RIx1

50RI

x550

UNIT

SIZE

7197

271

997

7197

371

998

7197

572

000

KIT

NUM

BER

UNIT

SIZE

PORT

ING

PLAT

E KI

TS

Kits

incl

ude:

1 Po

rting

Pla

te, 2

Loc

atin

g Ri

ngs,

4 Fa

sten

ers,

Req

uire

d O-

Ring

s

ORDERING DATA: SERIES RI ROTARY ACTUATOR

CUST

OM R

OTAR

Y AC

TUAT

ORS

ARE

AVAI

LABL

E.PL

EASE

CON

SULT

PHD

.

!Op

tions

may

affe

ct u

nit l

engt

h.Se

e un

it di

men

sion

and

opt

ions

page

s fo

r add

ers.

CUSTOM

PR

OD

UCTS

FIT

TO

NEED

CUSTOM

PR

OD

UCTS

FIT

TO

NEED

3D-3

3D



COMMON BENEFITS■ Available in three sizes and six torque ranges from 32 to

414 in-lb at 87 psi [3.6 to 46.8 Nm at 6 bar] and are availablein either imperial or metric versions.

■ Provide 0 to 180 degrees rotation and are infinitely adjustablethroughout the entire range.

■ Body and hub locating sleeve pins provide accurate location.

■ Zero backlash at ends of rotation for precise rotary positioning.

■ Optional three position units are available providing 90° midposition on double rack units only.

■ PHD Series 6790 Switches or proximity switch ready areavailable for interfacing to electrical controls.

■ Optional shock absorbers or bumpers provide quiet operationand end of rotation deceleration.

■ Optional port flow controls provide accurate control ofrotation speed.

SPECIFICATIONS Series RIPISTON SEALS Block VeePISTON Free Floating, Acetal MaterialPINION SHAFT One Piece Alloy Steel with Center Through HoleRACKS Alloy SteelEND CAPS Clear Anodized AluminumBODY Hardcoated AluminumBEARINGS Two Radial Ball BearingsPORTS NPT or BSPPBREAKAWAY PRESSURE 5 psi [0.35 bar]LUBRICATION Permanent for Non-Lube AirWORKING PRESSURE 100 psi [7 bar] MaximumSTANDARD ROTATIONS Fully Adjustable (0 to 180°)BACKLASH No Backlash at end of RotationLIFE Designed for 5,000,000 Trouble-Free CyclesOPERATING TEMPERATURE: OPTIONSANGLE ADJUSTMENT UNIT AB, AC, AW -20° to 160°F [-28.9° to 71.1°C]SHOCK ABSORBER UNIT NB, NC, NW 32° to 150°F [0° to 65.6°C]ROTATION SPEED CONTROL UNIT PB, PC, PW 5° to 160°F [-15° to 71.1°C]

THEORETICAL TORQUEin-lb/psi [Nm/bar]

BORE SIZE25

RISRID

32 50[3.9][7.8]

2.374.75

[1.2][2.4]

.731.45

[.6][1.2]

.36

.74

BENEFITS: SERIES RI ROTARY ACTUATOR

SERIES RI BENEFITS: INTEGRAL AIR LINES■ Series RI Rotary Actuators incorporate internal air passages

within the rotary pinion manifold to allow pneumatic couplingto other devices without tubing. Provides protection againstsevered or damaged air lines eliminating downtime.

■ Hub manifold interface provides from 4 to 8 passages throughthe pinion for maximum flexibility.

■ Units incorporate a hollow pinion for routing and protectingitems such as electrical cable.

■ Features enclosed inner tubing for protection from externalcontaminants.

■ Porting plate accessory allows for quick and easy transitionbetween hub manifold and customer tooling or end effectors.

SERIES RIxH BENEFITS: HOLLOW PINION■ Series RIxH Rotary Actuators offer a hollow pinion which

provides routing and protection for electrical cables and airlines.

■ Series RIxH Rotary Actuators provide a lower cost and lowerprofile solution with a larger opening through the pinion.

Series RIxH

Series RI

ShockAbsorbers

Piston

Pinion

Rack Assembly

Body

Cap

Cap Seal

CapUnit Porting(CW & CCW)

InternalAir Passages

Available with a Hub ManifoldInterface or a Hollow Pinion

3D-4

3D



DIMENSIONS: SERIES RISH ROTARY ACTUATOR SINGLE RACK

5.425[137.8]6.384

[162.2]8.464

[215.0]

A3.071[78.0]3.858[98.0]5.197

[132.0]

B3.031[77.0]3.819[97.0]5.157

[131.0]

D.472

[12.0].630

[16.0].630

[16.0]

E1.477[37.5]1.969[50.0]2.264[57.5]

F.738

[18.7]1.070[27.2]1.204[30.6]

H1.698[43.1]1.838[46.7]2.328[59.1]

K1.823[46.3]2.004[50.9]2.557[64.9]

J.406

[10.3].758

[19.3].575

[14.6]

GRISH125RISH525RISH132RISH532RISH150RISH550

UNITSIZE

.472[12.0].630

[16.0].630

[16.0]

CM3 x 0.5M3 x 0.5M3 x 0.5M3 x 0.5M4 x 0.7M4 x 0.7

L.102[2.6].102[2.6]——

M.098[2.5].118[3.0]——

N1.417[36.0]1.909[48.5]2.657[67.5]

P1.398[35.5]1.890[48.0]2.638[67.0]

R1.889[48.0]2.519[64.0]3.454[87.7]

S

1.969[50.0]2.520[64.0]3.150[80.0]

U.618

[15.7].854

[21.7]1.142[29.0]

WM14 x 1.5M14 x 1.5M20 x 1.5M20 x 1.5M20 x 1.5M20 x 1.5

Y.709

[18.0].787

[20.0]1.535[39.0]

Z.197[5.0].197[5.0].419

[10.6]

BB5/16-24

M8 x 1.255/16-24

M8 x 1.251/2-20

M12 x 1.75

DD.4715

[11.98].4715

[11.98].7077

[17.98]

CC.394

[10.0].650

[16.5].650

[16.5]

AARISH125RISH525RISH132RISH532RISH150RISH550

.731[18.6].888

[22.6]1.270[32.2]

V.157[4.0].236[6.0].666

[16.9]

EE2.283[58.0]2.598[66.0]3.701[94.0]

FF.197[5.0].315[8.0].315[8.0]

GG

LETTER DIMENSION

LETTER DIMENSION

METRIC INFORMATION SHOWN IN [ ].

UNITSIZE HH JJ

5.819[147.8]7.014

[178.2]9.094

[231.0]

10-32M5 x 0.8

1/8-27 NPT1/8-28 BSPP1/8-27 NPT

1/8-28 BSPP

NOTES:1) PORT POSITIONS INDICATED BY CIRCLED NUMBERS.2) PINION AND HUB SHOWN AT MID ROTATION.

.417[10.6].374[9.5].543

[13.8]

T

.0004[.01].0004[.01].0004[.01]

CC TOL±

PINION DETAIL

MM

T

Ø PP

Ø LLØ KK

SECTION CC

C C

2.244[57.0]2.677[68.0]3.150[80.0]

Ø PPRISH125RISH525RISH132RISH532RISH150RISH550

UNITSIZE

.677[17.2].846

[21.5]1.060[26.9]

Ø KK1.063[27.0]1.339[34.0]1.676[42.6]

Ø LL.236[6.0].276[7.0].354[9.0]

MM

PORT PLUG DETAILFOR METRIC UNITS

2X DDTHREAD THRU

JJ PORT

JJ PORT

Y THREAD THRU

Y THREAD THRU

4X M HOLE X N DEEPRIxx25 & RIxx32 ONLY

4X L THREAD8X L THREADFOR RIxx50 ONLY

A

2X F

A/2C

DB 4X G4X H

4X CC

2X BBPR

Ø U

S

T

FF

2X EE

AA

Z V

W

ZV

W AA

2X Z

GGHH

E

4X K

4X J

2X BB

SEE PAGE 3D-18 FORT-SLOT DIMENSIONS

PORT PLUGSEE PORT PLUGDETAIL FORMETRIC UNITS


PORT PLUGPER DIN 908

65

2

1

4

3

3D-5

3D



DIMENSIONS: SERIES RIDH ROTARY ACTUATOR DOUBLE RACK

1 2

34

56

78

1.280[32.5]1.378[35.0]1.378[35.0]

E.731

[18.6].888

[22.6]1.270[32.2]

M14 x 1.5M14 x 1.5M20 x 1.5M20 x 1.5M25 x 1.5M25 x 1.5

Y.709

[18.0].787

[20.0]1.535[39.0]

Z.394

[10.0].650

[16.5].650

[16.5]

AA.197[5.0].315[8.0].315[8.0]

GGRIDH125RIDH525RIDH132RIDH532RIDH150RIDH550

UNITSIZE

.618[15.7].854

[21.7]1.142[29.0]

WLETTER DIMENSION


V10-32

M5 x 0.81/8-27 NPT

1/8-28 BSPP1/8-27 NPT

1/8-28 BSPP

JJ

NOTES:1) PORT POSITIONS INDICATED BY CIRCLED NUMBERS.2) PINION AND HUB SHOWN AT MID ROTATION.3) FOR DIMENSIONS NOT GIVEN SEE RISH SINGLE RACK DIMENSION PAGE 3D-4.


4X JJ PORTTHIS END

2X Y THREAD THRUTHIS END

W

2X V2X Z

AA

2X Z

GG

E



2

4

13

65

3D-6

3D



DIMENSIONS: SERIES RIS ROTARY ACTUATOR SINGLE RACK


5.425[137.8]6.384

[162.2]8.464

[215.0]

A3.071[78.0]3.858[98.0]5.197

[132.0]

B3.031[77.0]3.819[97.0]5.157

[131.0]

D.472

[12.0].630

[16.0].630

[16.0]

E1.477[37.5]1.969[50.0]2.264[57.5]

F.738

[18.7]1.070[27.2]1.204[30.6]

H1.698[43.1]1.838[46.7]2.328[59.1]

K1.823[46.3]2.004[50.9]2.557[64.9]

J.406

[10.3].758

[19.3].575

[14.6]

GRIS125RIS525RIS132RIS532RIS150RIS550

UNITSIZE

.472[12.0].630

[16.0].630

[16.0]

CM3 x 0.5M3 x 0.5M3 x 0.5M3 x 0.5M4 x 0.7M4 x 0.7

L.102[2.6].102[2.6]——

M.098[2.5].118[3.0]——

N1.417[36.0]1.909[48.5]2.657[67.5]

P1.398[35.5]1.890[48.0]2.638[67.0]

R1.889[48.0]2.519[64.0]3.454[87.7]

S

1.969[50.0]2.520[64.0]3.150[80.0]

U.618

[15.7].854

[21.7]1.142[29.0]

WM14 x 1.5M14 x 1.5M20 x 1.5M20 x 1.5M20 x 1.5M20 x 1.5

Y.709

[18.0].787

[20.0]1.535[39.0]

Z.197[5.0].197[5.0].419

[10.6]

BB5/16-24

M8 x 1.255/16-24

M8 x 1.251/2-20

M12 x 1.75

DD.4715

[11.98].4715

[11.98].7077

[17.98]

CC.394

[10.0].650

[16.5].650

[16.5]

AARIS125RIS525RIS132RIS532RIS150RIS550

.731[18.6].888

[22.6]1.270[32.2]

V.157[4.0].236[6.0].666

[16.9]

EE2.283[58.0]2.598[66.0]3.701[94.0]

FF.197[5.0].315[8.0].315[8.0]

GG

LETTER DIMENSION

LETTER DIMENSION


UNITSIZE HH JJ

5.819[147.8]7.014

[178.2]9.094

[231.0]

10-32M5 x 0.8

1/8-27 NPT1/8-28 BSPP1/8-27 NPT

1/8-28 BSPP

NOTES:1) PORT POSITIONS INDICATED BY CIRCLED NUMBERS.2) PINION AND HUB SHOWN AT MID ROTATION.

.709[18.0].787

[20.0].787

[20.0]

T

.0004[.01].0004[.01].0004[.01]

CC TOL±


2X DDTHREAD THRU

JJ PORT

JJ PORT

Y THREAD THRU

Y THREAD THRU

4X M HOLE X N DEEPRIxx25 & RIxx32 ONLY

4X L THREAD8X L THREADFOR RIxx50 ONLY

A

2X F

A/2C

DB 4X G4X H

4X CC

2X BBPR

Ø U

S

T

FF

2X EE

AA

Z V

W

ZV

W AA

2X Z

GGHH

E

4X K

4X J

2X BB

SEE PAGE 3D-8 FORPRESSURE OUTPUTHUB INTERFACEDIMENSIONS

SEE PAGE 3D-8 FORPRESSURE INPUTHUB INTERFACEDIMENSIONS

SEE PAGE 3D-18 FORT-SLOT DIMENSIONS

PORT PLUGSEE PORT PLUGDETAIL FORMETRIC UNITSPORT PLUG

SEE PORT PLUGDETAIL FORMETRIC UNITS


1 2

34

56

78

21

87

6 5

43

65

2

1

4

3

3D-7

3D



DIMENSIONS: SERIES RID ROTARY ACTUATOR DOUBLE RACK


1 2

34

56

78

1.280[32.5]1.378[35.0]1.378[35.0]

E.731

[18.6].888

[22.6]1.270[32.2]

M14 x 1.5M14 x 1.5M20 x 1.5M20 x 1.5M25 x 1.5M25 x 1.5

Y.709

[18.0].787

[20.0]1.535[39.0]

Z.394

[10.0].650

[16.5].650

[16.5]

AA.197[5.0].315[8.0].315[8.0]

GGRID125RID525RID132RID532RID150RID550

UNITSIZE

.618[15.7].854

[21.7]1.142[29.0]

WLETTER DIMENSION


V10-32

M5 x 0.81/8-27 NPT

1/8-28 BSPP1/8-27 NPT

1/8-28 BSPP

JJ

NOTES:1) PORT POSITIONS INDICATED BY CIRCLED NUMBERS.2) PINION AND HUB SHOWN AT MID ROTATION.3) FOR DIMENSIONS NOT GIVEN SEE RIS SINGLE RACK DIMENSION PAGE 3D-6.


21

87

6 5

43

4X JJ PORTTHIS END

2X Y THREAD THRUTHIS END

W

2X V2X Z

AA

2X Z

GG

E

SEE PAGE 3D-8 FORPRESSURE OUTPUT

HUB INTERFACEDIMENSIONS

SEE PAGE 3D-8 FOR PRESSURE INPUTHUB INTERFACE DIMENSIONS



2

4

13

65

3D-8

3D



DIMENSIONS: SERIES RI ROTARY ACTUATOR OUTPUT HUB

PRESSURE OUTPUT HUB O-RING INTERFACE

1.969[50]

2.520[64.0]3.150[80.0]

A1.378[35.0]1.811[46.0]2.283[58.0]

.472[12.0].610

[15.5].797

[20.2]

D.512

[13.0].630

[16.0].906

[23.0]

E.177[4.5].197[5.0].276[7.0]

FRIS125 & RID125RIS525 & RID525RIS132 & RID132RIS532 & RID532RIS150 & RID150RIS550 & RID550

UNITSIZE

10-32M5 x 0.81/4-28

M6 x 1.05/16-24

M8 x 1.25

CLETTER DIMENSION


B.2355[5.98].3147[7.99].3940

[10.01]

H45.045.030.030.022.522.5

L°90.090.060.060.045.045.0

K°1.575[40.0]1.811[46.0]2.362[60.0]

M10-32

M5 x 0.81/8-27 NPT

1/8-28 BSPP1/8-27 NPT

1/8-28 BSPP

N2.244[57.0]2.677[68.0]3.150[80.0]

P.197[5.0].276[7.0].433

[11.0]

J.026[.7].026[.7].039[1.0]

G

NOTE:1) PINION AND HUB SHOWN AT MID ROTATION.

.0003[.008].0003[.008].0003[.008]

H TOL ±.002[.05].002[.05].002[.05]

A TOL ±.197[5.0].315[8.0].354[9.0]

R

BB

CC

RIxx25 RIxx32 RIxx50

A A

RIxx25 RIxx32 RIxx50

4X N CUSTOMER PORT 6X N CUSTOMER PORT8X N CUSTOMER PORT

6X Ø F x G DPO-RING INTERFACE

4X C THD x D DP


4X C THD x D DP

Ø P Ø P Ø P

Ø E

Ø E

L°

4X K°

L°

6X K°

L°

8X K°

Ø JØ J

4X (G) 6X (G)8X (G)

2X Ø H x R DP2X Ø H x R DP

Ø BØ B

Ø MØ M

Ø M

Ø AØ A

6 235

1

4

8 347

1 2

56

4 3

21

5 326

4

1

7 438

6 5

21


1

4X C THD x D DP

Ø E Ø J 2X Ø H x R DP

Ø B

Ø A

2

34

L°

4X K°

L°

6X K°

L°

8X K°


PRESSURE INPUT PORT INTERFACE

3D-9

3D



21

87

6 5

43

NOTES:1) PORT POSITIONS INDICATED BY CIRCLED NUMBERS.2) PINION AND HUB SHOWN AT MID ROTATION.3) MID POSITION HOLDING TORQUE ON DOUBLE RACK

UNITS IS 1/2 CATALOGED OUTPUT TORQUE.

DOUBLE RACKSIZE 25, 32 & 50

PORT PLUG DETAIL FOR METRIC UNITS



3RID1253RID5253RID1323RID5323RID1503RID550

UNITSIZE

LETTER DIMENSION

.618[15.7].854

[21.7]1.142[29.0]

AA10-32

M5 x 0.81/8-27 NPT

1/8-28 BSPP1/8-27 NPT

1/8-28 BSPP

JJ.807

[20.5]1.161[29.5]1.870[47.5]

ZZ.354[9.0].492

[12.5].591

[15.0]

LL.354[9.0].571

[14.5].701

[17.8]

MM.618

[15.7].854

[21.7]1.142[29.0]

NN1.496[38.0]1.965[49.9]2.362[60.0]

KK

A B C

C B

A(0-90-180°)

P R P R P R


3RID1253RID5253RID1323RID5323RID1503RID550

UNITSIZE

LETTER DIMENSION

.709[18.0]1.496[38.0]1.890[48.0]

Z.197[5.0].315[8.0].315[8.0]

GG.295[7.5].472

[12.0]1.535[39.0]

PP.472

[12.0].630

[16.0].630

[16.0]

C

DOUBLE RACK DIMENSIONS

2X JJ PORT(UNIT CONTROL)

2X JJ PORT(3 POSITIONCONTROL)

2X JJ PORT(UNIT CONTROL)

Z

AA NN

2X ZZ PP

KKC2X MM

LLGG


FOR DIMENSIONS NOT SHOWN HERE:SERIES RIxH SEE PAGES 3D-4 AND 3D-5SERIES RI SEE PAGES 3D-6 AND 3D-7

2

1

4

3 5 6

DIMENSIONS: 3-POSITION UNITS


3D-10

3D



ENGINEERING DATA: SERIES RI ROTARY ACTUATORSPECIFICATIONS

TORQUE AT 87 psi [6 bar] PISTON DIAMETER PISTON AREA AIR VOLUME (2 x 180)

36.7173.4169.48139.13244.82489.65

cm3in3

2.244.484.248.4914.9429.88

UNIT SIZERISxx25RIDxx25RISxx32RIDxx32RISxx50RIDxx50

cm2

4.904.908.068.0619.6119.61

in2

0.760.761.251.253.043.04

mm252532325050

in0.980.981.261.261.971.97

3.67.27.114.323.446.8

Nmin-lb326463127207414

5725721206120618501850

292292511511697697

130013002275227531003100

254625465365536582298229

RISxx25RIDxx25RISxx32RIDxx32RISxx50RIDxx50

BEARING LOADS TABLEMAXIMUM RADIAL

PAYLOAD ATMOUNTING SURFACE

MAXIMUMAXIAL

PAYLOADUNITSIZE NlbNlb

THEORETICAL TORQUE OUTPUTUNIT SIZE

RISxx25INPUT

PRESSUREpsi405060708090

100

RIDxx25 RISxx32 RIDxx32 RISxx50Nm10.713.416.118.821.524.226.9

in-lb95.1

118.9142.7166.4190.2214.0237.8

Nm6.68.29.9

11.513.114.816.4

58.272.787.3

101.8116.4130.9145.4

Nm3.34.14.95.86.67.48.2

in-lb29.136.443.650.958.265.472.7

Nm3.34.25.05.86.77.58.3

in-lb29.536.944.251.659.066.373.7

Nm1.72.12.52.93.33.74.2

in-lb14.718.422.125.829.533.236.9

bar2.73.44.14.85.56.26.8

in-lbRIDxx50

21.526.932.237.643.048.453.7

in-lb190.2237.8285.3332.9380.4428.0475.5

Nm

PRESSURE AND BREAKAWAY RATINGSAll Series RI Rotary Actuators have a maximum pressure rating

of 100 psi [7 bar] with a 5 psi [0.3 bar] breakaway pressure. Theyare for pneumatic application only.

OPERATING TEMPERATURESStandard Series RI Rotary Actuators are recommended for use

in temperatures from -20° to +160°F [-28° to +71°C]. If a PHDsupplied external rotation speed control valve is used, thetemperature range is from 5° to 160°F [-15° to 71°C]. If a PHDsupplied shock absorber is used, the temperature range is from 32° to150°F [0° to 66°C]. Consult PHD for temperatures beyond this range.



BACKLASHAll units have 0° of backlash at ends of rotation.

ANGLE OF ROTATIONStandard angle of rotation is 180°. Consult PHD for rotation

requirements above 180°. All units require angle adjustment orshock absorber option which provide 90° adjustment from each end.

ROTATIONAL ALLOWANCEThe rotational allowance of the Series RI Rotary Actuator is 7°

to 15° on the nominal specified rotation.

ROTATION RATESThe speeds given in the chart on page 3D-11 reflect one cycle of

180° with no load applied at 87 psi [6 bar]. Times given are averageand include the deceleration time through each type stopping method.

CONTROLSControl of output hub speed is extremely important as inertia

force is a function of rotational speed and distance from load tooutput hub center. Flow controls and shock absorbers should beconsidered when inertial loads are applied. See pages 3D-11through 3D-15 for information on Series RI Rotary Actuatorcontrols. See pages 3D-19 through 3D-21 for information on loadstopping capacity.

.26

.26

.23

.23

.21

.21


BACKLASH SPECIFICATIONS

REPEATABILITY

BACKLASHMID

ROTATIONUNITSIZE +/- (degrees)

0.140.530.420.940.120.35

(degrees)

BACKLASHTHREE POSITION

UNIT

1.251.250.350.350.20.2

+/- (degrees)

REPEATABILITYTHREE POSITION

UNIT

0.160.160.10.1

0.060.06

+/- (degrees)

3D-11

3D



ENGINEERING DATA: SERIES RI ROTARY ACTUATOR

ROTARY ACTUATOR ROTATION RATE TABLE(NO LOAD CONDITIONS)

MANIFOLD PINION SPECIFICATIONS

UNITSIZE

RISx25RIDx25RISx32RIDx32RISx50RIDx50

NUMBER OFPASSAGES

446688

FLOW THROUGHPASSAGES @ 87 psi [6 bar]

CFM11

1.31.31.51.5

Liter/Min

CENTER THROUGH HOLEDIAMETER

in mm0.1970.1970.2760.2760.4330.433

55771111

ROTARY ACTUATOR WEIGHT TABLES

28.328.336.836.842.542.5

ACTUATOR WEIGHTUNITSIZE lb kg


33.57.68

14.315

1.361.593.443.636.486.80

ACTUATOR WEIGHTUNITSIZE lb kg

3 RIDxx253 RIDxx323 RIDxx50

4.19.617.6

1.864.367.98

SINGLE AND DOUBLEROTARY ACTUATORS

3 POSITIONROTARY ACTUATORS

UNITSIZE


ROTATION RATES at 87 psi(seconds maximum)

shockpad shock

speedcontrol

0.130.230.110.280.130.28

0.180.410.110.300.220.40

0.180.230.310.320.290.78

3D-12

3D



OPTIONS: SERIES RI ROTARY ACTUATOR


Angle adjustment options and/or shock absorber options mustbe ordered on each unit. Both provide mechanical stops and angleadjustment of -90° from both ends of rotation.

The standard rotation for Series RI is 180°. The ability to adjustover a wide range eliminates the need to order special units forspecific angles of rotation.

The angle adjustment screw has a shock pad as standardproviding quiet actuator operation in less demanding applications.In more demanding applications, the optional shock absorbersshould be specified to handle the higher energy dissipation.

AB

AC

AW

21

38

6

7

5

4

21

38

6

7

5

4

.200[5.1].240[6.1].310[7.9]

A2.578[65.5]3.392[86.2]3.373[85.7]

.770[19.6]1.100[27.9]1.360[34.5]

DRISx125RISx525RISx132RISx532RISx150RISx550

UNITSIZE

.551[14.0].787

[20.0].787

[20.0]

CLETTER DIMENSION


B

.369[9.4].424

[10.8].505

[12.8]

A1.770[45.0]2.644[67.2]2.625[66.7]

1.094[27.8]1.375[34.9]1.750[44.5]

DRIDx125RIDx525RIDx132RIDx532RIDx150RIDx550

.551[14.0].787

[20.0].984

[25.0]

CLETTER DIMENSION


B

69223-0169230-0169226-0169231-0169226-0169233-01


ANGLE ADJUSTMENTKIT NO.*

*ANGLE ADJUSTMENT KITS INCLUDE:FOR RISxx UNITS - 1 ANGLE ADJUSTMENT SCREW AND 1 NUTFOR RIDxx UNITS - 1 ANGLE ADJUSTMENT SCREW, 1 NUT,

1 THREAD SEAL AND 1 SEAL WASHER1 KIT REQUIRED PER END OF ADJUSTMENT DESIRED.

UNITSIZE

UNITSIZE

2X A2X B

2X C 2X D

2X A2X B

2X C

2X D

ANGLE ADJUSTMENTS WITHSHOCK PAD INSTALLED BOTH ENDS

ANGLE ADJUSTMENTS WITHSHOCK PAD INSTALLEDCOUNTERCLOCKWISE 90°

ANGLE ADJUSTMENTS WITH SHOCKPAD INSTALLED CLOCKWISE 90°

3D-13

3D




Either angle adjustment options and/or shock absorber optionsmust be ordered on each unit. Both provide mechanical stops andangle adjustment of -90° from both ends of rotation.

The shock absorber options provide maximum decelerationcontrol and rotational stopping ability. The -NB, -NC, and -NWoptions provide the rotary actuator with the shock absorber factoryinstalled in the Series RI rotary actuator. See pages 3D-19 through3D-21 for details on unit stopping capacity with installed shockabsorbers. Reference the Shock Absorber Specifications Chart fornominal effective angle of rotation in each direction.

NB

NC

NW

SHOCK ABSORBER INSTALLEDBOTH DIRECTIONS

SHOCK ABSORBER INSTALLEDCOUNTERCLOCKWISE DIRECTION

SHOCK ABSORBER INSTALLEDCLOCKWISE DIRECTION

NOTE: The shock absorber doubles as the rotation adjustment.Shock absorbers or angle adjustment option must be installed in therotary actuator prior to operating the unit. Operation of units withoutinstalled shocks or angle adjustment can damage the units and voidany and all warranties. Only shock absorbers specified by PHD

should be used in Series RI Rotary Actuators. The use of any othershock absorbers will affect actuator performance and lifeexpectancy.

PHD recommends replacing shocks every 1,000,000 cycles tomaintain peak actuator performance and life.


UNITSIZE


THREADTYPE

SHOCKABSORBER

WEIGHTlb kg in-lb Nm

KINETICENERGY

LOADSTROKEin mm in mm in mmmm

M14 x 1.5M14 x 1.5M20 x 1.5M20 x 1.5M20 x 1.5M25 x 1.5

.50

.50

.75.625.75.91

12.712.719.115.919.123.1

.12

.12

.28

.28

.28

.76

.05

.05

.13

.13

.13

.34

1501502252252251860

1717252525210

3.593.594.674.674.675.51

SHOCKABSORBER

LENGTH

ACROSSWRENCH

FLATS

91.291.2118.6118.6118.6140.0

.49

.49

.69

.69

.69

.88

12.412.417.517.517.522.2

691466915369147691546914769156

SHOCKABSORBER

KIT NO.

SHOCK ABSORBERS KITS INCLUDE:FOR RISxx UNITS - 1 SHOCK AND 1 NUTFOR RIDxx UNITS - 1 SHOCK, 1 NUT, 1 THREAD SEAL,

AND 1 SEAL WASHER1 KIT REQUIRED PER END OF ADJUSTMENT DESIRED

303070605570

SHOCKABSORBEREFFECTIVE

ANGLE

.369[9.4].424

[10.8].505

[12.8]

A2.039[51.8]2.515[63.9]3.176[80.7]

1.094[27.8]1.375[34.9]1.750[44.5]

DRID125RID525RID132RID532RID150RID550

UNIT.551

[14.0].787

[20.0].984

[25.0]

CLETTER DIMENSION


B.200[5.1].240[6.1].310[7.9]

A2.847[72.3]3.263[82.9]3.924[99.7]

.770[19.6]1.100[27.9]1.360[34.5]

DRIS125RIS525RIS132RIS532RIS150RIS550

UNIT.551

[14.0].787

[20.0].787

[20.0]

CLETTER DIMENSION

METRIC INFORMATION SHOWN IN [ ].NOTE: FOR RISxxx UNITS WITH CUSHION USE RIDxxx DIMENSION L

B

2X B2X A

2X D2X C

2X A2X B

2X C

2X D

21

38

6

7

5

4

21

38

6

7

5

4

SINGLE RACK

DOUBLE RACK


3D-14

3D





The PHD Series RI offers optional external compact flowcontrol fittings for adjusting output hub rotation speed. The speed ofthe hub is controlled by regulating the cylinder exhaust. The controlfittings are unidirectional flow control valves where intake air flowsfreely through the flow control and exhaust is metered out throughan adjustment screw. Intake capacity is slightly greater than the fullopen exhaust capacity, enabling maximum variation of hub rotationspeed.

The PHD Series RI flow control fittings are mounted directly tothe caps and provide an integral tube fitting connection. They alsoswivel 360° around the ports, easing tube routing installation.Rotational velocities are adjusted and maintained by the captivatedfine adjustment screw with a locking nut to ensure precise velocitycontrol and repeatability in output hub rotation speed.

PB

PC

PW

ROTATION SPEED CONTROLBOTH DIRECTIONS

ROTATION SPEED CONTROLCOUNTERCLOCKWISE DIRECTION

ROTATION SPEED CONTROLCLOCKWISE DIRECTION

NOTE: Flow control fitting is effective between 15 to 100 psi[1.0 to 7.0 bar] and from 5° to 160°F [-15° to 71.1°C].

1 KIT REQUIRED PER ENDOF ADJUSTMENT DESIREDNOTE: ONE PORT CONTROL

FITTING PER KIT

691956919869196691996919669199

RIxx125RIxx525RIxx132RIxx532RIxx150RIxx550

ROTATION SPEED CONTROLKIT NO.

.984[25.0]1.614[41.0]1.693[43.0]

A.827

[21.0]1.043[26.5]1.043[26.5]

.630[16.0].817

[20.8].743

[18.9]

D.394

[10.0].650

[16.5].650

[16.5]

ERIxx125RIxx525RIxx132RIxx532RIxx150RIxx550

UNITSIZE

.197[5.0].069[1.8].069[1.8]

CLETTER DIMENSION

B.156[4.0].250[6.4].250[6.4]

F

METRIC INFORMATION SHOWN IN [ ].UNITSIZE

Ø F TUBE SIZE

C

A

B

D

E

M

This option equips the rotary actuator with magnets on the rackfor use with PHD Series 6790 Solid State Switches. These switchesmount easily to the actuator using the switch slots in the sides ofthe body.

PHD Series 6790 Solid State and Reed Switches are designedspecifically to provide an input signal to various types ofprogrammable controllers or logic systems. See Switches andSensors section for ordering information on the Series 6790Switches.

MAGNETS FOR PHD 6790 SOLIDSTATE AND REED SWITCHES

SWITCH INTO GROOVEIN EITHER SIDE

0.60.60.4

RIxxx25RIxxx32RIxxx50

UNITSIZE

REPEATABILITY(degree)

NPN 4.5 - 30 VDC, 2 m cableNPN 4.5 - 30 VDC, 5 m cableNPN 4.5 - 30 VDC, Quick ConnectPNP 4.5 - 30 VDC, 2 m cablePNP 4.5 - 30 VDC, 5 m cablePNP 4.5 - 30 VDC, Quick Connect

DESCRIPTION67903-1-0267903-1-0567923-167904-1-0267904-1-0567924-1

PART NO.

10.69.35.9

HYSTERESIS(degree)

505142

BAND WIDTH(max. degree)

312826

(min. degree)

SOLID STATE SWITCH SPECIFICATIONS

0.60.80.6


REPEATABILITY(degree)

9.57.45.1

HYSTERESIS(degree)

444336

BAND WIDTH(max. degree)

272626

(min. degree)

REED SWITCH SPECIFICATIONS

SOLID STATE SWITCHES

PNP or NPN 4.5 - 30 VDC, 2 m cablePNP or NPN 4.5 - 30 VDC, 5 m cablePNP or NPN 4.5 - 30 VDC, Quick Connect

DESCRIPTION67902-1-0267902-1-0567922-1

PART NO.

REED SWITCHES

UNITSIZE

3D-15

3D



ACCESSORIES: SERIES RI ROTARY ACTUATOR

EXTERNAL PROXIMITY SWITCHESThis accessory provides for the external mounting of round

metal sensing proximity switches. One switch mounting kit isrequired per switch and includes the plastic bracket with therequired mounting hardware. A steel switch target is also includedin each external proximity switch mounting kit.

The Series RI body accepts up to four external proximityswitches. The typical application requires two switch mounting kits,however, if the three position model has been ordered, the threeposition switch bracket kit must also be ordered. This kit utilizes thetop target groove in the hub and therefore positions the proximityswitch higher from the body.

Proximity switches are supplied by the customer, see chartbelow for switch diameter specifications, dimension C.

VIEW AA

A

A

702077020870209

3 RIDxx253 RIDxx323 RIDxx50

3 POSITION PROXIMITYKIT NO.

3 POSITION PROXIMITY KITS INCLUDE:1 TARGET ASSEMBLY

- 1 CAM PIN - 1 TARGET

1 BRACKET OR BRACKET ASSEMBLY WITHREQUIRED MOUNTING HARDWARE

.504[12.8].571

[14.5].748

[19.0]

A.413

[10.5].452

[11.5].571

[14.5]


UNITSIZE

.197[5.0].197[5.0].315[8.0]

CLETTER DIMENSION


B

691816918269184


STANDARD PROXIMITYKIT NO.

STANDARD PROXIMITY KITS INCLUDE:1 TARGET ASSEMBLY

- 1 CAM PIN - 1 TARGET

1 BRACKET OR BRACKET ASSEMBLY WITHREQUIRED MOUNTING HARDWARE

UNITSIZE

UNITSIZE

BRACKET ASSEMBLY3RIxxx25 ONLY

3 POSITION BRACKET

STANDARD BRACKET

STANDARD BRACKET

3 POSITION BRACKET

Ø C PROXIMITY SWITCH

A

B

3D-16

3D





SERIES RIxx25 SERIES RIxx32

SERIES RIxx50


.138[3.5].571

[14.5].315[8.0]

A——

.945[24.0]1.024[26.0]

10-32[M5 x 0.8]1/8 NPT

[1/8 BSPP]1/8 NPT

[1/8 BSPP]

D.472

[12.0].906

[23.0].984

[25.0]

E.197[5.0].276[7.0].433

[11.0]

FRIx125RIx525RIx132RIx532RIx150RIx550

UNITSIZE

——

.413[10.5]

——

CLETTER DIMENSION

B

RIx125RIx525RIx132RIx532RIx150RIx550

UNITSIZE

LETTER DIMENSION

.197[5.0].276[7.0].433

[11.0]

M1.181[30.0]1.496[38.0]1.732[44.0]

L1.969[50.0]2.559[65.0]2.953[75.0]

K1.378[35.0]1.811[46.0]2.283[58.0]

J10-32

[M5 x 0.8]1/4-28

[M6 x 1.0]5/16-24

[M8 x 1.25]

H.197[5.0].276[7.0].433

[11.0]

G


UNITSIZE

LETTER DIMENSION

10-24[M5 x 0.8]

1/4-20[M6 x 1.0]

5/16-18[M8 x 1.25]

U2.047[52.0]2.598[66.0]2.913[74.0]

S.1252

[3.005].1252

[3.005].2503

[6.007]

R1.496[38.0]1.969[50.0]2.126[54.0]

N


UNIT

REQUIREDSCREW TORQUE

7575150150250250

10-32 x .5M5 x 0.8 x 121/4-28 x .75

M6 x 1.0 x 225/16-24 x .875M8 x 1.25 x 25

SCREWSIZE

(SHCS)719727199771973719987197572000

KITNUMBER in-lb Nm

8.58.516.916.928.228.2

LOCATION MARK

8X D PORT

SERIES RI ROTARYPORT INTERFACE

4X THRU AND COUNTERBOREFOR H SHCS

2X Ø R THRU(ON Ø N BOLT HOLE CIRCLE)CUSTOMER MOUNTING

4X U THREAD(ON Ø S BOLT HOLE CIRCLE)CUSTOMER MOUNTING

4X LRADIUS

Ø M THRU

A

A

A

A

E

4X B

K

Ø J

Ø N

Ø S

4X 45°

F

G

LOCATION MARK

RIxx25 UNIT SHOWN AT MID-ROTATION

O-RINGLOCATING RING

LOCATION MARKCUSTOMER PORTING PLATE

FASTENER

PORT ID # ON ALL SIDES

PORT ID # ON ALL SIDESPORT ID # ON ALL SIDES

Ø M THRU

Ø SØ N

4X LRADIUS

K

Ø J

4X THRUAND COUNTERBOREFOR H SHCS

LOCATIONMARK

F G

E

4X A

SERIES RIROTARY PORTINTERFACE

2X Ø R THRU(ON Ø N BOLT HOLE CIRCLE)CUSTOMER MOUNTING

4X U THREAD THRU(ON Ø S BOLT HOLE CIRCLE)CUSTOMER MOUNTING

4X 45°

2X 15°

4X D PORT

4X THRU AND COUNTERBOREFOR H SHCS4X L

RADIUS

2X Ø R THRU(ON Ø N BOLTHOLE CIRCLE)

CUSTOMERMOUNTING

4X U THREAD(ON Ø S BOLT HOLE CIRCLE)CUSTOMER MOUNTING

LOCATION MARK

G

F

AE

B

K

Ø J

Ø S

C

B

A

A

SERIES RIROTARY PORTINTERFACE6X D PORT

Ø M THRU

C

Ø N

4X 45°

A

KITS INCLUDE:1 PORTING PLATE, 2 LOCATING RINGS,4 FASTENERS, REQUIRED O-RINGS

PORTING PLATEThis accessory provides a convenient conversion from the

manifold output hub interface to a threaded port interface. It allowsthe use of the manifold hub feature of the Series RI Rotary Actuator,without the need to drill communication holes through the attachedtooling. It also allows the plumbing of secondary actuators using thefittings and tubing of your choice.

The Porting Plate is made from 6061-T6 aluminum and ismachined on all sides insuring flat and parallel mounting surfaces.Four drilled and tapped holes are provided to attach your tooling.Location accuracy is maintained through the use of locating ringsand dowel pin holes.

The Porting Plate also features numbered ports correspondingto the rotary actuator input ports. A location mark keeps proper portalignment simple during assembly.

3D-17

3D




LOCATION RINGSThese accessories provide accurate body and hub positioning.

The location sleeve fits into either the top or bottom H7 tolerancecounter bore holes on the PHD Series RI body or hub. They providedowel pin accuracy without requiring the additional space for adowel. Location rings allow either through bolt or tapped bodymounting to be used. The mounting bolt is placed through thelocation ring, simultaneously securing and locating the mating parts.

The body locating ring kit consist of two hardened and groundsteel sleeves sized to press into the H7 tolerance counter boredholes on either the top or bottom of the Series RIS body.

The hub locating ring kit consists of two hardened and groundsteel sleeves, sized to press into the hub counter bores located onthe top of the Series RI hub.

MANIFOLD O-RING SEAL KITThis accessory provides the necessary O-rings to fit the

manifold hub of the Series RI Rotary Actuator. This allows the rotaryactuator to easily interface to customer supplied tooling. TheO-rings are 70 durometer, Buna-N rubber.

.236[6.0].236[6.0].349[8.9]

A2.953[75.0]3.937

[100.0]4.528

[115.0]

C TOL.1.378[35.0]1.811[46.0]2.283[58.0]

ERIxx125RIxx525RIxx132RIxx532RIxx150RIxx550

UNITSIZE

.472[12.0].472

[12.0].709

[18.0]

Ø CLETTER DIMENSION

B.236[6.0].315[8.0].394

[10.0]

Ø F

METRIC INFORMATION SHOWN IN [ ].NOTE: LOCATING RINGS ARE TO BE PRESSED INTO BODY AND PINION

+.0002/-.0005+[.005]/-[.013]+.0002/-.0005+[.005]/-[.013]-.0002/-.0006-[.005]/-[.015]

D.118[3.0].079[2.0].276[7.0]

+.0001/-.0007+[.003]/-[.018]+.0001/-.0007+[.003]/-[.018]+.0001/-.0007+[.003]/-[.018]

F TOL.

692106921069212


BODY LOCATING RINGKIT NO.

BODY LOCATING RING KITS INCLUDE2 LOCATING RINGS

692166921769219


PINION LOCATING RINGKIT NO.

PINION LOCATING RING KITS INCLUDE2 LOCATING RINGS

UNITSIZE

UNITSIZE

21

38

6

7

5

4

56

47

1

8

2

3

BODY LOCATING RING KIT

2X B

PINION LOCATING RING KIT

EA

D

4X C

2X F

A

BODY LOCATING RING KIT

2X G PINIONLOCATING RING I.D.

4X H BODYLOCATING RING I.D.

.197[5.0].236[6.0].315[8.0]

Ø G.354[9.0].354[9.0].591

[15.0]

Ø H

MANIFOLD O-RING SEAL KIT SPECIFICATIONS

UNITSIZE

RIxx25RIxx32RIxx50

NUMBER OFO-RINGS

IN KITO-RING

SIZE101010

O-RINGMANIFOLD

KIT NO.692026920369205

2 mm I.D. x 1 mm C.S.3 mm I.D. x 1 mm C.S.

4 mm I.D. x 1.5 mm C.S.


3D-18

3D



ACCESSORIES: SERIES RI ROTARY ACTUATORT-NUTS

T-nuts allow the rotary actuator to be mounted from the side ofthe unit. T-nuts can be positioned at any point along the t-slotgrooves which are 90° to the pinion hub.

Sizes 32 & 50SLOT DIMENSION

A.177[4.5].240[6.1].240[6.1]

METRIC INFORMATION SHOWN IN [ ].-xx = -00 INDICATES STANDARD PLATING -03 INDICATES -Z1 PLATING

B.315[8.0].472

[12.0].472

[12.0]

C.079[2.0].088[2.2].088[2.2]

D.138[3.5].157[4.0].157[4.0]

E——

.216[5.5].216[5.5]

UNITSIZE


H.252[6.4].137[3.5].137[3.5]

G——

.050[1.3].050[1.3]

KM3 x 0.5

M4 x 0.7

M4 x 0.7

J.217[5.5].472

[12.0].472

[12.0]

NUT DIMENSIONSF

.095[2.4].374[9.5].374[9.5]

NUTPART NO.

3204-022

63759-xx

63759-xx

L.472

[12.0].669

[17.0].669

[17.0]

M.630

[16.0].787

[20.0].984

[25.0]

SLOT DIMENSIONSTYPICAL BOTH SIDES (POSITION 1 & 3)

NUT DIMENSIONSK THREAD

J

H

K THREAD

J

M

2X A

4X C

2X B

2X D

F F

H

GE

INSERT NUTS ON THIS ENDOF UNIT, EITHER SIDE.

LNON-USABLE

SLOT LENGTH

Size 25

LATHE LOADER CAM SHAFT FINISHING PROCESSAPPLICATION EXAMPLES

In this application, a combination of a slide, two grippers, anda rotary actuator load and unload parts from a lathe. One Series190 Gripper grasps a blank part on a holding rack while anotherSeries 190 Gripper grasps a finished part in the lathe. A Series SKSlide extends out, and the finished part is removed from the lathewhile the blank part is removed from the holding rack. A Series RIRotary Actuator then rotates clockwise. The slide retracts, the blankpart is loaded into the lathe, and the finished part is released into aholding bin. The Series RI Rotary Actuator is beneficial for thisapplication due to its high torque output and the capability ofrouting airlines and switch cables through the pinion. This featureeliminates any external airlines, which could wear or sever causingcatastrophic damage.

In this application, two grippers are combined with a Series RIRotary Actuator to load and unload cam shafts into a grindingmachine for finishing. First a Series SK Slide, mounted to a gantry,will provide the reaching motion as a Series5300 Gripper picks up the unfinished camshaft. The Series RI Rotary Actuatorrotates the grasped cam to the topposition. The gantry then cycles backto the grinding machine, thesecond gripper is extended downinto the machine to pick up thefinished cam shaft, the slideretracts, the rotary actuatorrotates the grippers andshafts, and the unfinishedcam is loaded into themachine. Finally thefinished cam shaft is movedand placed in a completiontray on a conveyor. TheSeries RI Rotary Actuator isideal for this applicationdue to its high torqueoutput and the capability ofrouting airlines and switchcables through the pinion.

3D-19

3D



ROTARY ACTUATOR SELECTION: SERIES RI

SIZING AN RI UNIT WITHANGLE ADJUSTMENTS

STEP 1Determine Rotational Mass Moment of Inertia (Jm)Select the illustration from the application types on page3D-22 that most resembles your specific application. Severalseparate calculations may be necessary to fully describe yourapplication. Using the appropriate application equation,calculate the mass moment of inertia for the type of conditionillustrated. The total mass moment of inertia is the sum of theindividual calculations.

STEP 2Determine Necessary Acceleration (αs)This equation calculates the acceleration required to move thedesired rotation in the desired time. The solution is given inradians/sec2.

STEP 3Calculate the Required Starting Torque (TA)Select the illustration from the application types on page3D-22 that most resembles your specific application.Several separate calculations may be necessary to fully describeyour application. Using the appropriate application equation,calculate the torque for each for each type of conditionillustrated that matches your application. The total torque willbe the sum of the individual calculations. Note: Torquecalculations are theoretical, an appropriate safety factorshould be considered. PHD recommends a minimum safetyfactor of 2 to account for friction loss, airline and valve size,and attached accessories.

STEP 4Calculate the Peak Velocity (ω)This formula estimates the peak velocity of the Series RIx inoperation, and is used to determine the stopping capacity ofthe rotary actuator. The solution is given in radians/sec.

STEP 5Compare Peak Velocity (ω) to Allowable ImpactCompare your peak velocity to the maximum allowablevelocity for the given Mass Moment of Inertia (Jm) of yourapplication. The chart is labeled Shock Pad EnergyCapacity. The charts represent the total amount of energy thatis able to be absorbed and provide acceptable motion of theactuator. Acceptable motion is defined as a maximum of onedegree of motion reversal when the load comes to end ofstroke. Note: You may run slightly higher velocities and loadsthan these charts provide and not damage the unit; however,you may find the motion profile unacceptable. Please contactPHD if you are considering using the Series RIx actuatoroutside of the recommended energy range and shockabsorbers are not a desired option. If the shock pad does notprovide enough stopping capacity for your application,go tothe next sizing section titled “Sizing a RIx Unit with Shocks.”

ALLO

WAB

LE IM

PACT

VEL

OCIT

Y (r

ad/s

ec)

ATTACHED LOAD, Jm (in-lb sec2) [Nms2]

0

1.0

0 0.5[.0565]

1.0[.113]

1.5[.170]

2.0[.226]

2.5[.283]

3.0[.339]

3.5[.396]

4.0[.452]

4.5[.508]

5.0[.565]

2.0

3.0

4.0

5.0

6.0

32 mm

25 mm 50 mm

SHOCK PAD ENERGY CAPACITY

(Time of Rotation in Seconds)2Acceleration (rad/sec2) = αS = .035 x Rotation Angle in Degrees

Starting Torque (in/lb) = TA, TAg

Balanced Load TA = Jm x αA x SFUnBalanced Load TAg = [(Jm x αA) + (Fg x k)] x SF

UNITSIZE


Peak Velocity (rad/sec)

.045 x Average Velocity






Rotational Angle in DegreesTime of Rotation in Seconds

Average Velocity (deg/sec) =

3D-20

3D




SIZING AN RI UNIT WITH SHOCKSSTEP 6

Compare Peak Velocity (ω) to Allowable ImpactCompare your peak velocity to the maximum allowablevelocity for the given Mass Moment of Inertia (Jm) of yourapplication. The chart is labeled Shock EnergyCapacity. The charts represent the total amount of energy thatis able to be absorbed and provide acceptable motion of theactuator. Acceptable motion is defined as a maximum of onedegree of motion reversal when the load comes to end ofstroke. Note: You may run slightly higher velocities and loadsthan these charts provide and not damage the unit; however,you may find the motion profile unacceptable. Please contactPHD if you are considering using the Series RIxxx actuatoroutside of the recommended energy range.

STEP 7Calculate the Kinetic Energy (Ke)This formula calculates the kinetic energy of your application.This value will be used to calculate the actual total energy to becompared to the maximum allowable total energy.

STEP 8Calculate the Propelling Energy (Pe)These formulas calculate the additional amount of energy thatthe shock will experience due to the piston force of the actuator.

STEP 9Calculate the Total Energy (Et)This formula sums all of the energies that the shock will experience.

STEP 10Compare the Total Energy (Et) to the Maximum Total Energy (Em)and also Acceptable Motion (Ea)If Acceptable Motion is desired as defined in STEP 6, the totalenergy should be less than both of the charted values givenbelow. If some additional bounce is acceptable, (Et) can be upto the same value as (Em). If not, go to a larger actuator orcontact PHD for application assistance.

STEP 11Calculate Energy per Hour (Eh)Compare your applications energy per hour requirementagainst the charted maximum.

SHOCK ENERGY CAPACITY

Kinetic Energy (in/lb [Nm]) = Ke = 1/2 Jm ω2

UNITSIZE


in/lb.1902 x psi.3804 x psi.935 x psi1.621 x psi2.283 x psi5.539 x psi

Pe = Propelling EnergyNm

.3116 x bar

.6233 x bar1.5321 x bar2.6556 x bar3.7411 x bar9.0768 x bar

Total Energy Et (in/lb [Nm]) = Ke + Pe

Energy/Hour (in/lb [Nm]) = Cycles/Hour x Et

VELO

CITY

(rad

/sec

)

Moment of Inertia (in-lb sec2) [Nms2]

0

5.0

0 0.5[.057]

1.0[.113]

1.5[.170]

2.0[.226]

2.5[.283]

3.0[.339]

10.0

15.0

20.0

25.0

30.0 RISx25 and RIDx25

VELO

CITY

(rad

/sec

)


0

5.0

0 0.5[.057]

1.0[.113]

1.5[.170]

2.0[.226]

2.5[.283]

3.0[.339]

10.0

30.0

40.0

50.0 RISx32 and RIx32

3.5[.395]

4.0[.452]

4.5[.508]

5.0[.565]

15.0

20.0

25.0

35.0

45.0

VELO

CITY

(rad

/sec

)


0

5.0

0 1.0[.113]

2.0[.226]

3.0[.339]

10.0

30.0 RISx50 and RIDx50

4.0[.452]

5.0[.565]

15.0

20.0

25.0

6.0[.678]

7.0[.791]

RIDx50

RISx50

RIDx32

RISx32

RIDx32

RISx32

MAX ALLOWABLE CHART (Em)

ACCEPTABLE MOTION CHART (Ea)

UNITSIZE


in-lb7575

225255225

1860

Energy/Hour

300,000300,000400,000400,000400,000600,000

Nm8.58.5

25.425.425.4

210.2

Ke*in-lb/Hr

33,89033,89045,19045,19045,19067,791

Nm/Hr

UNITSIZE


in-lb64.475.0

155.0205.0225.0663.7

Velocityrad/sec

27.515.747.120.928.819.6

Nm7.38.5

17.523.225.475.0

Ke*

*Acceptable motion is defined as a maximum of one degree of motionreversal when the load comes to end of stroke.

3D-21

3D




DETERMINING ALLOWABLE ATTACHEDLOAD WEIGHT

Following are the steps required to determine the allowableattached load weight on the Series RIx rotary actuator. You will needto know the weight of the attached load, the orientation of the rotary,and the center of gravity distance of the load from the hub face.Please refer to the supplied formulas to determine each of theallowable conditions.

STEP 12Determine Allowable Attached Load Weight (Lf)The next step in determining the proper Series RIxactuator size is to determine the bearing capacity of theunit according to your application requirements.

STEP 13Calculate Maximum Actuator Radial Loading (Lm)This formula calculates the maximum radial loading allowed forthe Series RI actuator based on 5,000,000 cycles and the axialload (La) that you are placing on the bearings. Note: Center ofGravity distance is different depending on if the unit ishorizontal or vertical. In horizontal applications, (Cg) is thedistance from the mounting face of the hub to the (Cg) of theload. In vertical applications, (Cg) is the distance from thecenterline of the hub to (Cg) of the load.

STEP 15Calculate the Deceleration (αd)This formula calculates the deceleration of the unit based onthe peak velocity of the individual actuator. The solution isgiven in radians/sec2

STEP 16Calculate Stopping Torque (Td)This is the kinetic energy used to stop a rotary load to yourapplication conditions. This formula is one of the componentsrequired when comparing reaction forces on the bearing. Usingthe identical illustrations and formulas on pages 3D-21 and 3D-22used when calculating the required starting torque, replace theacceleration value with the deceleration value. This is thereaction torque required to stop the load. PHD recommends asafety factor of 1 to 1.25.

STEP 17Calculate Radial Bearing Load At Stopping (LS)This formula converts the sum torque’s of the propelling torqueand stopping torque into the reaction force on the twobearings.

STEP 18Calculate Max. Fixed Radial Load (Lf)This formula will produce the maximum radial load weight thatcan be safely attached to the rotary actuator, given the axialload weight and (Cg) distance of your application.

STEP 19Compare (Lf) to Actual Load Affixed to Actuator (Lr)Compare the (Lf) value to the weight of the attached load. If theattached load is less than the (Lf) value, the actuator is correctfor your application. If the attached load is greater than the (Lf)value, go to the next size actuator and rerun the abovecalculations until the (Lf) value is greater than the attachedload weight.

La = Axial Load Weight (lb)

Horizontal Orientation (in)(Cg) = Distance from Face of Hub to

Center of Gravity of Load

Vertical Orientation (in)(Cg) = Distance from Centerline of Hub

to Center of Gravity of Load

Max Actuator Radial Loading (Lm)

Cg

Cg

IMPERIAL METRIC

-1.4175 (La) + 1106.861.933 + Cg

Lm =

-1.8138 (La) + 3015.572.5 + Cg

Lm =

-2.699 (La) + 6573.923.553 + Cg

Lm =

-36.0024 (La) + 125042.449.1 + Cg

Lm =

-46.0702 (La) + 340706.263.5 + Cg

Lm =

-68.5696 (La) + 74265690.25 + Cg

Lm =

UNITSIZE

RIxxx25

RIxxx32

RIxxx50

UNITSIZE


in-lb.369 x psi.737 x psi.727 x psi1.454 x psi2.378 x psi4.755 x psi

Propelling Torque (Tp)Nm

.6047 x bar1.2077 x bar1.1913 x bar2.3827 x bar3.8969 x bar7.7921 x bar

UNITSIZE


lb(Tp + Td)/.96875(Tp + Td)/1.1667(Tp + Td)/1.5625

Radial Bearing Load at Stopping (LS)N

(Tp + Td)/.0246(Tp + Td)/.0296(Tp + Td)/.0399

Max Fixed Radial Load (Lf) = Lm - Ls

Lr = Weight of Attached Load

UNIT SIZERIxxx25RISxx32RIDxx32RISxx50RIDxx50

αd = Deceleration (rad/sec2)ω2/1.032ω2/2.571ω2/2.229ω2/1.920ω2/2.330

STEP 14Calculate Propelling Torque (Tp)This formula is one of the components required whencomparing reactionforces on thebearing. You mayuse the formula orsimply look up thetorque produced bythe rotary actuator ata specified pressure.

Stopping Torque (in/lb) = TA, TAg

Balanced Load TA = Jm x αd x SFUnbalanced Load TAg = [(Jm x αd) + (Fg x k)] x SF

3D-22

3D




Jm = x k2Fg

g

Jm = x12

Fg

ga2 + 3k2

( ) ( )Fg1

gJm = x (4a2 + 3k2)

12+ xFg2

g(4b2 + 3k2)

12

b-a2


( )k2Jm = +L2

3Fg

gxx 1

4


347

8

k

L

k k

a

b

c

Fg2

a Fg1

b


a Fg1

Fg2

b


kFg








Jm = x 4a2 + c2

12+ x 4b2 + c2

12Fg1

gFg2

g

Jm = x x k225

Fg

g

Point Load

LOAD ORIENTATION



UNBALANCED LOADS

T = Jm x α x SF

UNBALANCED LOADS

Jm = x k2

2Fg

g

a2 + b2

12Jm = xFg

g

a

IMPERIAL UNITS:Jm = Rotational Mass Moment of Inertia (in-lb-sec2) (Dependent on physical size of object and weight)g = Gravitational Constant = 386.4 in/sec2 Fg = Weight of Load (lb) k = Radius of Gyration (in)T = Torque required to rotate load (in-lbs) α = Acceleration (rad/sec2) t = time (sec)SF = Safety Factor



3D-23

3D



SIZING EXAMPLE: SERIES RI ROTARY ACTUATOR

APPLICATION INFORMATION - EXAMPLE 1Weight = 32.2 lbRotation Angle = 180°Pressure = 87 psiOrientation = HorizontalCenter of Gravity Distance = 2"Desired Cycle Rate = .75 secSafety Factor: Acceleration = 2

Deceleration = 1Axial Load = ØRadial Load (Lr) = 32.2 lbCycles per Minute = 40

EXAMPLE 1Determine Required Starting Torque for Application

STEP 1 Determine (Jm)

STEP 2 Determine (αA)

STEP 3 Starting Torque

RISxx25 WILL PRODUCE SUFFICIENT TORQUE

Check for Stopping Capacity

STEP 4 Calculate Peak Velocity (ω) RISxx25

STEP 5 Compare to Graph (refer to pg.3D-19)SHOCK PAD WILL NOT PERFORM AS DESIRED

This velocity is greater than the shockpad allows, go to the section labeled

“Sizing an RIx Unit with Shocks”

STEP 6 Compare Peak Velocity to Allowable Impact Velocity for a given (Jm) Load using Shock Absorbers

Compare to graph on page 3D-20.RISx is acceptable for this application.

STEP 7 Calculate Kinetic Energy (Ke)

gJm =

2x =

386.4 2x

Jm = .0833 x 4.5 = .375 in-lb-sec2

αA = .035(.75)2 = 11.2 rad/sec2

T = Jm x αA x SF

T = .375 x 11.2 x 2 = 8.4 in-lb

αA = .035Time of Rotation

in Seconds2

Fg k2 32.2 32

180

Angle Rotationin Degrees

ω = .045 x.75

= 10.8 rad/sec

Ke = 1/2 x Jm x ω2

Ke = 1/2 x (.375) x (10.8)2 = 21.87 in-lb

180ω = .045 x Average Velocity (refer to chart pg. 19)

STEP 8 Calculate Propelling Energy (Pe)

STEP 9 Calculate Total Energy (Et)

STEP 10 Compare Maximum Total Energy (Em) to Total Energy (Et) and Acceptable Motion Energy to Total Energy

SHOCKS WILL PERFORM AS DESIRED

STEP 11 Calculate Energy per Hour (Eh)

STEP 12 Calculate Allowable Attached Load WeightAxial Load from Application = La

RISx25 = .1902 x psiPe = .1902 x 87 = 16.55 in-lb

Et = Ke + Pe

Et = 21.87 + 16.55 = 38.42 in-lb

Em ≥ Et 75 ≥ 38.42

Ea ≥ Et 64.4 ≥ 38.42

Cycles/Hr = Cycles/min x 60Cycles/Hr = 40 x 60 = 2400

La = Ø

Eh = 2400 x 38.42 in-lb = 92,208 in-lb/hr

300,000 ≥ 92,208

k

4.00

6 Ø

k

STEP 13 Calculate Max Actuator Radial Loading (Lm)Determine Cg Distance = 2"

STEP 14 Calculate Propelling Torque (Tp)

STEP 15 Calculate Deceleration (αd)

Tp = .369 x 87 psi = 32.103 in-lb

αd = ω2/1.032

Tp = .369 x psi

αd = (10.8)2/1.032

αd = 113.0 rad/sec2

1.933 + CgLm =

Lm = 281.43 lb

-1.4175 (La) + 1106.86

3D-24

3D



STEP 18 Calculate Max Fix Radial Load (Lf)

STEP 19 Compare Max Fix Radial Load (Lf) to Actual Load Affixed to Actuator (Lr)

Check for Stopping Capacity

STEP 4 Calculate Peak Velocity (ω)

RIDxx32

STEP 5 Compare Peak Velocity to Allowable Impact Graph(pg. 3D-19)

This velocity is in the range of shock padsbut not with the attached load Jm of 6.055

it is closer to handling .25 in-lbs2, go to“Sizing an RIxx Unit with Shocks”

STEP 6 Compare Peak Velocity to Allowable Impact Velocity for a given (Jm) Load using Shock Absorbers

Compare to graph on page 20.RIDxx32 is acceptable for this application.

STEP 7 Calculate Kinetic Energy (Ke)

EXAMPLE 1 CONT.

STEP 16 Calculate Stopping Torque (Td) (from STEP 7pg. 3D-20)

Ls = (Tp + Td)/.96875Ls = (32.103 + 42.38)/.96875

Ls = 76.88 lb

STEP 17 Calculate Radial Bearing Load at Stopping (Ls) (from chart pg. 3D-21)

Lf = Lm - Ls

Lf = 281.43 - 76.88Lf = 204.54

Lf ≥ Lr

204.54 ≥ 32.2 lbRISxx25 FITS THIS APPLICATION

APPLICATION INFORMATION - EXAMPLE 2Weight = 15 lb mounting plate & two - 8 lb grippersRotation Angle = 180°Pressure = 65 psiOrientation = VerticalCenter of Gravity Distance = 10"Desired Cycle Rate = 1.25 secSafety Factor: Acceleration = 2 Deceleration = 1Cycles per Minute = 20 cyc/min = 1200 cyc/hrAxial Load (La) = 31 lbRadial Load (Lr) = Ø


EXAMPLE 2

Determine Required Starting Torque for Application

STEP 1 Determine (Jm)for Mounting Plate

Jm for 2 Point Loads (Gripper)

STEP 2 Determine (αA)

STEP 3 Starting Torque

RIDxx32 WILL PRODUCE SUFFICIENT TORQUE

gJm = x

12

Jm =386.4

x12

Jm = .0388198 x 49.333

Jm = 1.9151 in-lb-sec2

gJm = x k2

386.4x 102 = 2.0704 in-lb-sec2

Total Jm = 1.9151 + 2(2.0704)

Jm = 6.056 in-lb-sec2

αA = .035(1.25)2 = 4.032 rad/sec2

Fg a2 + b2

15 (24)2 + (4)2

Fg

8

180

TA = Jm x αA x SF

TA = 6.056 x 4.032 x 2

TA = 48.836 in-lb

ω = .028 x1.25

= 4.032 rad/sec

ω = .028 x Average Velocity180

Ke = 1/2 x Jm x ω2

Ke = 1/2 (6.056) x (4.032)2 = 49.225 in-lb

10"

4"

24"

gripper

gripper

mountingplate

Td = .375 x 113.0 x 1 = 42.375Td = Jm x αd x SF

Td = 42.375

3D-25

3D



STEP 12 Calculate Allowable Attached Load WeightAxial Load Weight = 31 lb = (La)

STEP 13 Calculate Max Actuator Radial Loading (Lm)Determine Cg Distance = 10"

STEP 14 Calculate Propelling Torque (Tp) (refer to chartpg. 3D-20)

RIDx32 =Tp = 1.454 x psi

Tp = 1.454 x 65 psi = 94.51 in-lb

STEP 15 Calculate Deceleration (αd)

STEP 16 Calculate Stopping Torque (Td) (from STEP 7pg. 3D-20)

Td = 6.056 x 7.29 x 1Td = 44.15 in-lb

STEP 17 Calculate Radial Bearing Load at Stopping (Ls) (refer to chart pg. 3D-21)

Ls = (Tp + Td)/1.1667

Ls = 138.7/1.1667

Ls = 118.8 lb

STEP 18 Calculate Max Fix Radial Load (Lf)

Lf = Lm - Ls

Lf = 236.75 - 118.8

Lf = 117.95 lb

STEP 19 Compare Max Fix Radial Load (Lf) to Actual Load Affixed t to Actuator (Lr)

Lf ≥ Lr

117.95 lb ≥ 31 lb

RIDxx32 FITS THIS APPLICATION


EXAMPLE 2 CONT.

STEP 8 Calculate Propelling Energy (Pe)

STEP 9 Calculate Total Energy (Et)

STEP 10 Compare Maximum Total Energy (Em) to Total Energy (Et)

SHOCK WILL PERFORM AS DESIRED

STEP 11 Calculate Energy per Hour (Eh)

RIDx32 = 1.621 x psiPe = 1.621 x (65 psi) = 105.37 in-lb

Et = Ke + Pe

Et = 49.225 + 105.37 = 154.6 in-lb

Em ≥ Et 225 ≥ 154.6Ea ≥ Et 225 ≥ 154.6

Cycles/Hr = Cycles/min x 60Cycles/Hr = 40 x 60 = 2400

Eh = 2400 x 154.6 in-lb = 371,040 in-lb/Hr

371,040 ≤ 400,000

Lm = = 236.75 lb2.5 + 10

2.5 + CgLm = -1.8138 (La) + 3015.57

-1.8138 (31) + 3015.57

αd = ω2/2.229αd = (4.032)2/2.229

αd = 7.29 rad/sec2

3D-26

3D



APPLICATION EXAMPLE: SERIES RI ROTARY ACTUATOR

LATHE LOADER

CAM SHAFT FINISHING PROCESS

In this application, a combination of a slide, 2 grippers, and arotary actuator load and unload parts from a lathe. One Series 190Gripper grasps a blank part on a holding rack while another Series190 Gripper grasps a finished part in the lathe. A Series SK Slideextends out, and the finished part is removed from the lathe whilethe blank part is removed from the holding rack. A Series RI RotaryActuator then rotates clockwise. The slide retracts, the blank part isloaded into the lathe, and the finished part is released into a holdingbin. The Series RI Rotary Actuator is beneficial for this applicationbecause of its integral airlines. This feature eliminates any externalairlines, which could wear or sever causing catastrophic damage.

In this application, two grippers are combined with a Series RIRotary Actuator to load and unload cam shafts into a grindingmachine for finishing. First a Series SK Slide, mounted to a gantry,will provide the reaching motion as a Series 5300 Gripper picks upthe unfinished cam shaft. The Series RI Rotary Actuator rotates thegrasped cam to the top position. The gantry then cycles back to thegrinding machine, the second gripper is extended down into themachine to pick up the finished cam shaft, the slide retracts, therotary actuator rotates the grippers and shafts, and the unfinishedcam is loaded into the machine. Finally the finished cam shaft ismoved and placed in a completion tray on a conveyor. The Series RIRotary Actuator is ideal for this application due to the integral airlines which eliminate the flexing and twisting of external lines. Ifcrimped, cut, or pulled loose it could result in the dropping of thepart into a valuable grinding machine.

3D-27

3D


(800) 624-8511www.phdinc.com/rfCAT-03

ROTARY ACTUATORSSERIES RF

INDEX:Ordering Data

Page 3D-28

BenefitsPage 3D-29

DimensionsPages 3D-30 and 3D-31

Engineering DataPage 3D-32

OptionsPages 3D-33 and 3D-34

AccessoriesPages 3D-35 and 3D-36


Pages 3D-37 to 3D-40

Sizing ExamplePages 3D-41 to 3D-43

Low Profile Design Provides High Torque

NEW!NEW!

3D-28

3D


(800) 624-8511www.phdinc.com/rf CAT-03

ORDERING DATA: SERIES RF ROTARY ACTUATOR

CUST

OM R

OTAR

Y AC

TUAT

ORS

ARE

AVAI

LABL

E. P

LEAS

E CO

NSUL

T PH

D.

!Op

tions

may

affe

ct u

nit l

engt

h.Se

e un

it di

men

sion

and

opt

ions

page

s fo

r add

ers.

TO O

RDER

SPE

CIFY

:Pr

oduc

t, Se

ries,

Typ

e, D

esig

n No

.,Bo

re S

ize, R

otat

ion,

and

Opt

ions

.

NOTE

:1)

Switc

hes

and

switc

h ki

ts m

ust b

e or

dere

d se

para

tely.

1-

SF

RPROD

UCT

R - R

otar

y

SERI

ESF

- Low

Pro

file

DESI

GN N

O.1

- Im

peria

l5

- Met

ric

25PB

ABQ1

9-

ANGL

E AD

JUST

MEN

T(S

tand

ard)

AB -

Angl

e ad

just

men

t with

sho

ck p

adin

stal

led

both

end

sTh

is o

ptio

n m

ust b

e or

dere

d w

ith th

e un

it.

OPTI

ONS

Q19

- Hol

low

Pin

ion

BORE

SIZE

14 m

m20

mm

25 m

m

180

x

ROTA

TION

180°

-

TYPE

S - P

neum

atic

ROTA

TION

SPE

ED C

ONTR

OL V

ALVE

PB -

Rota

tiona

l Spe

ed C

ontro

ls b

oth

dire

ctio

nsPC

-Ro

tatio

nal S

peed

Con

trols

cou

nter

cloc

kwis

ePW

- Ro

tatio

nal S

peed

Con

trols

clo

ckw

ise

RFSx

14RF

Sx20

RFSx

25

6970

069

700

6970

2

KIT

NO.

UNIT

PROX

IMIT

Y SW

ITCH

KIT

S

NOTE

:One

Rot

atio

nal S

peed

Con

trol f

ittin

g pe

r kit.

6894

6-01

6894

7-01

6894

6-03

6894

7-03

RFSx

14RF

Sx20

RFSx

25

UNIT

IMPE

RIAL

NO.

M

ETRI

C NO

.RO

TATI

ON S

PEED

CON

TROL

REP

LACE

MEN

T KI

TS

5580

3-1-

0255

804-

1-02

5582

3-1

5582

4-1

NPN

4.5

- 24

VDC

with

2 m

eter

cab

lePN

P 4.

5 - 2

4 VD

C w

ith 2

met

er c

able

NPN

4.5

- 24

VDC

with

Qui

ck C

onne

ctPN

P 4.

5 - 2

4 VD

C w

ith Q

uick

Con

nect

DESC

RIPT

ION

PART

NO.

SERI

ES 5

580

HALL

EFF

ECT

SWIT

CHES

5580

2-1-

0255

822-

1NP

N or

PNP

4.5

- 24

VDC

with

2 m

eter

cab

leNP

N or

PNP

4.5

- 24

VDC

with

Qui

ck C

onne

ct

DESC

RIPT

ION

PART

NO.

SERI

ES 5

580

REED

SW

ITCH

ES

1843

1-00

1-02

1843

1-00

2-02

NPN

10 -

30 V

DC w

ith 2

met

er c

able

PNP

10 -

30 V

DC w

ith 2

met

er c

able

DESC

RIPT

ION

PART

NO.

6mm

SQU

ARE

INDU

CTIV

E PR

OXIM

ITY

SWIT

CHES

1753

3-00

-02

1753

3-00

-05

2 m

eter

cab

le5

met

er c

able

LENG

THPA

RT N

O.

CORD

SETS

WIT

H QU

ICK

CONN

ECT

CUSTOM

PR

OD

UCTS

FIT

TO

NEED

CUSTOM

PR

OD

UCTS

FIT

TO

NEED

3D-29

3D



BENEFITS■ Series RF Rotary Actuators feature a low profile body design

with a large output mounting hub to cover a wide range ofapplications.

■ Available in three sizes with a standard rotation of 180° andtorque ranging from 7 to 67 in-lb at 100 psi [0.8 to 7.7 Nmat 7 bar].

■ The Series RF rack and pinion design features high tensilesteel racks and a one-piece pinion/output hub providingdurability and long life.

■ Zero backlash at ends of rotation for precise rotary positioning.

■ Appropriate PHD Series SHP Slides and Series GRT Grippersbolt directly to the Series RF output hub.

■ All units feature built-in standard angle adjustments and areinfinitely adjustable from 0 - 180° of rotation.

■ Standard internal urethane shock pads provide quiet operationand end of stroke deceleration with precise repeatabilityprovided by a hard stop .

■ Standard through mounting holes in the body are threaded toprovide versatility and ease of mounting of the actuator.

■ Available in imperial and metric versions for flexibility ofdesign for a world market.

BENEFITS: SERIES RF ROTARY ACTUATOR

SPECIFICATIONS SERIES RFPISTON SEALS Block VeePISTON One Piece with RackPINION SHAFTS One Piece Alloy Steel with Integral Output HubRACKS Alloy SteelEND CAPS Clear Anodized AluminumBODY Hard Coated AluminumBEARINGS Radial Ball BearingPORTS NPT [BSPP]BREAKAWAY PRESSURE Under 15 psi [1 bar]LUBRICATION Permanent for Non-Lube AirWORKING PRESSURE 100 psi [7 bar] MaximumSTANDARD ROTATIONS Fully Adjustable (0 to 180°)BACKLASH No Backlash at End of RotationLIFE Designed for 5 Million Trouble-Free CyclesOPERATING TEMPERATURE -20° to 160°F [-28.9° to 71.1°C]

THEORETICAL TORQUEin-lb/psi [Nm/bar]

RFSx14RFSx20RFSx25

[.11][.40][1.09]

.07

.24

.67

UNIT SIZE

■ Optional switch kits allow the use of either PHD Series 5580switches or Series 18431 6 mm square inductive proximityswitches for easy interfacing to electrical controls.

■ Optional port flow controls provide accurate control ofrotation speed.

One Piece Piston and Rack

Direct Mounting forPHD Series GRT

Grippers and SeriesSHP Slides

One Piece Pinionand Output Hub

Angle Adjustment withIntegral Shock Pad

(as Standard)

Double Rackand Pinion Drive

SealedRadial Bearing

Switch Slot

Switch Target Groove

3D-30

3D



DIMENSIONS: SERIES RF ROTARY ACTUATOR, SIZE 14 & 20


1.713[43.5]2.598[66.0]

2.244[57.0]3.386[86.0]

D.546

[13.9].979

[24.9]

E1.059[26.9]1.418[36.0]

F.394

[10.0].551

[14.0]

G.669

[17.0].925

[23.5]

HARFS114RFS514RFS120RFS520

UNITSIZE

2

1

4

3

5

6

2.501[63.5]3.700[94.0]

B.473

[12.0].610

[15.5]

K1.417[36.0]2.126[54.0]

J.977

[24.8]1.320[33.5]

C.197[5.0].374[9.5]

L.303[7.7].433

[11.0]

M.606

[15.4].780

[19.8]

N10-32

[M5 x 0.8]10-32

[M5 x 0.8]

P1.772[45.0]2.756[70.0]

R.236[6.0].315[8.0]

S

#8[M4]#8

[M4]

U1.4940[37.9]2.106[53.5]

W1.7080[43.4]2.0960[53.2]

Y5-40

[M3 x 0.5]8-32

[M4 x 0.7]

Z60°

[60°]60°

[60°]

BB26°

[26°]26°

[26°]

DD5-40

[M3 x 0.5]5-40

[M3 x 0.5]

CC.1283[3.08].1283[4.09]

AARFS114RFS514RFS120RFS520

.1283[3.08].1908[4.09]

V

LETTER DIMENSION

LETTER DIMENSION


UNITSIZE

NOTES:1) THRU HOLES IN THE HUB ARE CLEARANCE FOR SHCS MOUNTING OF THE UNIT FROM THE HUB SIDE2) NUMBERS IN CIRCLES INDICATE PORT POSITION3) OUTPUT HUB SHOWN AT MID-POSITION

1/4-20[M6 x 1.0]

1/4-20[M6 x 1.0]

T

J

2X T THD THRUC’BORE OPPOSITESIDE FOR U SHCS

2X Ø V ±.0005[±.013]

2X P PORT

3X Z THREAD THRUON W BOLT HOLE CIRCLE

2X Ø AA ±.0005 [±.013]THRU ON W BOLTHOLE CIRCLE

2X CC THREAD THRUON Y BOLT HOLECIRCLE

SEE NOTE 1

A

C

R

2X G

H

L

K

E2X

F

B

S2X

M

N

W

Y

DD2XBB2X

DØ

3D-31

3D



DIMENSIONS: SERIES RF ROTARY ACTUATOR, SIZE 25


4.252[108.0]

D E F G HARFS125RFS525

UNITSIZE

5.826[148.0]

1.728[43.9]

3.622[92.0]

1.137[28.9]

1.870[47.5]

.787[20.0]

1.220[31.0]

2.953[75.0]

.787[20.0]

.472[12.0]

.630[16.0]

1.260[32.0]

1/8 NPT[1/8 BSPP]

2.500[63.5]

1.575[40.0]

1/4-20[M6 x 1.0]

B KJC L M N P R S

#10[M5]

U W Y Z BB DDCCAAV

LETTER DIMENSION

LETTER DIMENSION


UNITSIZE

NOTES:1) THRU HOLES IN THE HUB ARE CLEARANCE FOR SHCS MOUNTING OF THE UNIT FROM THE HUB SIDE2) NUMBERS IN CIRCLES INDICATE PORT POSITION3) OUTPUT HUB SHOWN AT MID-POSITION

T

2

1

4

3

5

6

FFEE.2533[6.43]

3.110[79.0]

2.926[74.3]

1/4-20[M6 x 1.0]

.2533[5.09]

60°[60°]

6-32[M4 x 0.7]

20°[20°]

.433[11.0]

2.500[63.5]

4X THRU &C’BORE OPPOSITESIDE FOR U SHCS

2X Ø V ±.0005[±.013]

4X T THDx EE DP

R

2X E

F

2X S 3X FF A

H

B

2X G

Ø D

2X Ø AA ±.0005 [±.013]THRU ON W BOLTHOLE CIRCLE

SEE NOTE 1

2X CC THEAD THRUON Y BOLT HOLE CIRCLE

Y

3X Z THREAD THRUON W BOLTHOLE CIRCLE

J

W

2X DD2X BB

2X P PORT

C

L

K

M

N

RFS125RFS525

3D-32

3D



ENGINEERING DATA: SERIES RF ROTARY ACTUATOR

PRESSURE AND BREAKAWAY RATINGSAll Series RF Rotary Actuators have a maximum pressure

rating of 100 psi [7 bar] with a 15 psi [1 bar] breakaway pressure.They are for pneumatic application only.

OPERATING TEMPERATURESStandard Series RF Rotary Actuators are recommended for use

in temperatures from -20° to +160°F [-28.9° to +71.1°C]. If a PHDsupplied external rotation speed control valve is used, thetemperature range is from 5° to 160°F [-15° to 71°C]. Consult PHDfor temperatures beyond this range.



BACKLASHAll units have 0° of backlash at ends of rotation. For backlash

at mid-rotation see chart below.

ANGLE OF ROTATIONStandard angle of rotation is 180°. Consult PHD for rotation

requirements above 180°. All units are supplied with angleadjustment which provides 90° adjustment from each end.

ROTATIONAL ALLOWANCEThe rotational tolerance of the Series RF Rotary Actuator is +0°

to +3° on the nominal specified rotation.

ROTATION RATESThe speeds given in the chart below reflect one cycle of 180°

with no load applied at 80 psi [5.5 bar]. Times given are average andinclude the deceleration time through to stopping.

ROTATION SPEED CONTROLSControl of output hub speed is extremely important as kinetic

energy generated by a rotating load is a function of rotational speedand distance from the load to output hub center. Flow controlsshould be considered to set speed so that the energy is within thelimit of the unit. See page 3D-33 for information on Series RFRotary Actuator controls. See pages 3D-37 through 3D-40 forinformation on load stopping capacity.

SPECIFICATIONSTORQUE AT 87 psi [6 bar] PISTON DIAMETER PISTON AREA AIR VOLUME (2 x 180)

7.1725.0768.55

ccin3

0.441.534.18

UNIT SIZE142025

cm2

1.543.144.91

in2

0.2390.4870.761

mm142025

in0.5510.7870.984

0.72.46.5

Nmin-lb6.0521.1857.92

2.354.557.60

1.963.796.33

8.7216.8628.16

10.4520.2433.81

142025

BEARING LOADS TABLEMAXIMUM RADIAL

PAYLOAD ATMOUNTING SURFACE

MAXIMUMAXIAL

PAYLOADUNITSIZE NlbNlb

1.332.594.32

5.9211.5219.22

MAXIMUM COMBINEDRADIAL AND AXIAL

PAYLOADNlb

THEORETICAL TORQUE OUTPUTUNIT SIZE

RFSx14INPUT

PRESSUREpsi405060708090100

RFSx20 RFSx25Nm

3.013.764.515.276.026.777.52

in-lb26.633.339.946.653.359.966.6

Nm1.101.381.651.932.202.482.75

in-lb9.7

12.214.617.019.521.924.3

Nm0.310.390.470.550.630.710.79

in-lb2.83.54.24.95.66.37.0

bar2.73.44.14.85.56.26.8

WEIGHT TABLEACTUATOR WEIGHTUNIT

SIZE lb kg142025

0.621.883.43

.28

.851.56

MAXIMUMROTATION RATE TABLE

ROTATION RATES @ 80 PSIUNITSIZE 90°142025

0.240.260.23

0.350.430.37

(SECONDS)180°

BACKLASH AT MID-ROTATION± DegreesUNIT SIZE

142025

2.801.380.82

3D-33

3D



OPTIONS: SERIES RF ROTARY ACTUATOR


The PHD Series RF Rotary Actuators offer optional externalcompact flow control fittings for adjusting output hub rotationspeed. The speed of the hub is controlled by regulating the cylinderexhaust. The control fittings are unidirectional flow control valveswhere intake air flows freely through the flow control and exhaust ismetered out through an adjustment screw. Intake capacity is slightlygreater than the full open exhaust capacity, enabling maximumvariation of hub rotation speed.

The PHD Series RF flow control fittings are mounted directly tothe caps and provide an integral tube fitting connection. They alsoswivel 360° around the ports, providing easy installation of tubing.Rotational velocities are adjusted and maintained by the captivatedfine adjustment screw with a locking nut to ensure precise velocitycontrol and repeatability in output hub rotation speed.

PB ROTATION SPEED CONTROLBOTH DIRECTIONS

NOTE: Flow control fitting is effective between 15 to 100 psi[1.0 to 7.0 bar] and from 5° to 160°F [-15° to 71.1°C].

UNITSIZE

LETTER DIMENSION


1 KIT REQUIRED PER END OF ADJUSTMENT DESIREDNOTE: ONE PORT CONTROL FITTING PER KIT

68946-0168946-03

RFSx14 and RFSx20RFSx25

UNIT SIZE

ROTATION SPEED CONTROLREPLACEMENT KIT NO.IMPERIAL METRIC

68947-0168947-03

RFS114RFS514RFS120RFS520RFS125RFS525

.156[4.0].156[4.0].250[6.4]

Ø F.394

[10.0].394

[10.0].650

[16.5]

E.035[0.9].156[4.0].109[2.8]

D.015[0.4].136[3.5].089[2.3]

C.827

[21.0]1.043[26.5]1.043[26.5]

B.984

[25.0].984

[25.0]1.614[41.0]

A.606

[15.4].780

[19.8]1.26

[32.0]

N.303[7.7].433

[11.0].630

[16.0]

M

Ø F TUBE SIZE

A

C

E SQ

N

M

DB

3D-34

3D



This option provides a hole through the standard output huband pinion shaft for feeding pneumatic or electrical lines from theback of the rotary actuator to the output hub. The hub has the samemounting as the standard unit. A port is provided on the bottom ofthe pinion shaft and an o-ring interface on the face of theoutput hub.

Q19 OUTPUT HUB WITHHOLLOW PINION(sizes 20 & 25 only)

OPTIONS: SERIES RF ROTARY ACTUATOR

The angle adjustment screw has a standard shock padproviding energy dissipation, accurate mechanical repeatability, andquiet actuator operation at end of rotation.

The standard rotation for Series RF is 180 degrees. Themechanical stop provides an adjustment range of 90 degrees fromeach end of rotation. The ability to adjust over this wide rangeeliminates the need to order special units with specific angles ofrotation.

AB ANGLE ADJUSTMENTS WITHSHOCK PAD INSTALLED BOTH ENDS(STANDARD)

See pages 3D-37 through 3D-40 for details on the stoppingcapacity of the installed angle adjustment with shock pad. Referencethe Angle Adjust Specifications Chart for nominal effective angle ofrotation in each direction.

The angle adjustment is factory installed and must remaininstalled prior to operation. Operation of units without an angleadjustment can damage the units and void any and all warranties.Only the PHD angle adjustment with integral shock pad should beused in Series RF Rotary Actuators. The use of any other angleadjustment screw will affect the actuator performance and lifeexpectancy.

ANGLE ADJUSTMENT SPECIFICATIONS

ANGLE ADJUSTMENTREPLACEMENT

KIT NO.

THREADTYPE

DECELERATIONSTROKEUNIT

SIZE142025

mm0.300.560.91

in0.0120.0220.036

mmM6 x 1.0

M8 x 1.25M12 x 1.75

697136971469715

WEIGHTkg

0.0050.0140.032

lb0.010.030.07

KINETIC ENERGYLOAD

Nm0.00460.01640.0446

in-lb0.0410.1450.395

LENGTHmm244050

in0.961.561.97

WRENCHHEX SIZE

mm346

DECELERATIONEFFECTIVE

ANGLE5°5°5°


C C

SECTION C-C

UNIT SIZELETTER DIMENSION

RFS120RFS520RFS125RFS525

10-32[5 x 0.8]1/8 NPT

[1/8 BSPP]

Ø A.176[4.5].339[8.6]

Ø KK.295[7.5].433

[11.0]

Ø LL.039[1.0].039[1.0]

MM

UNIT SIZE

HOLLOW PINION O-RING KIT

142025

—3642-059-13642-064-1

KIT NO.

A PORT THREAD

MM Ø LLØ KK

Angle Adjustment Replacement Kits Include:(1) Angle adjustment screw with integral shock pad, (1) Nut, (1)

Thread Seal1 Kit is required per end of adjustment desired


3D-35

3D



ACCESSORIES: SERIES RF ROTARY ACTUATOR

PROXIMITY SWITCH KITThis accessory provides for the mounting of a 6 mm square,

PHD Series 5580 solid state switch, or PHD 18431 inductiveproximity switch. One switch mounting kit is required per switch,with the typical application requiring two kits. The kit includes aswitch target as well as the required mounting hardware.

The Series RF body accepts two proximity switches, which areeasily mounted on the actuator using the switch slots in the sides ofthe body.

The switch targets mount in the groove around the output hubOD. The switch target has a magnet on one side for use with theSeries 5580 switch and is to be installed with the magnet toward theswitch face. If the Series 18431 switch is used, the magnet shouldbe installed away from the switch face.

Proximity switches are ordered separately, see PHD's maincatalog for complete switch specifications.


EACH SWITCH KIT CONTAINS THE FOLLOWING:1 - TARGET ASSEMBLY W/MAGNET1 - TARGET FASTENER1 - SWITCH FASTENER

RFSx25 UNIT KITS ALSO INCLUDE:1 - SWITCH BRACKET

SWITCH KIT(1 KIT PER ROTATION)

SWITCH SLOT(ONE EACH SIDE)

SWITCH FASTENER

TARGET FASTENER

SWITCH(SOLD SEPARATELY)

SERIES RFSx14 & 20 SERIES RFSx25SWITCH KIT(1 KIT PER ROTATION)

SWITCH SLOT(ONE EACH SIDE) SWITCH FASTENER

TARGET FASTENER

SWITCH(SOLD SEPARATELY)

55803-1-0255804-1-0255823-155824-1

NPN 4.5 - 24 VDC with 2 meter cablePNP 4.5 - 24 VDC with 2 meter cableNPN 4.5 - 24 VDC with Quick ConnectPNP 4.5 - 24 VDC with Quick Connect

DESCRIPTIONPART NO.

SERIES 5580 HALL EFFECT SWITCHES

55802-1-0255822-1

NPN or PNP 4.5 - 24 VDC with 2 meter cableNPN or PNP 4.5 - 24 VDC with Quick Connect

DESCRIPTIONPART NO.

SERIES 5580 REED SWITCHES

18431-001-0218431-002-02

NPN 10 - 30 VDC with 2 meter cablePNP 10 - 30 VDC with 2 meter cable

DESCRIPTIONPART NO.

6 mm SQUARE INDUCTIVE PROXIMITY SWITCHES

17533-00-0217533-00-05

2 meter cable5 meter cable

LENGTHPART NO.

CORDSETS WITH QUICK CONNECT

SWITCH SPECIFICATIONS

A

CC

A

D

B

PROXIMITY SWITCH KITS

KIT NO.

SWITCHFASTENER

SIZEUNITSIZE142025

Nm0.60.61.1

in-lb5510

M3 x 0.5 x 4M3 x 0.5 x 4M3 x 0.5 x 14

697006970069702

REQUIREDTORQUE SWITCH

FASTENERTARGET

FASTENERSIZE

M4 x 0.7M4 x 0.7M4 x 0.7

Nm0.60.60.6

in-lb555

REQUIREDTORQUE TARGET

FASTENER

SERIES 18431 6 mm SQUARE INDUCTIVE SWITCHREPEATABILITY

(DEGREES)UNITSIZE142025

± .35± .36± .14

HYSTERESIS(DEGREES)

± .79± .72± .67

BAND WIDTHMAX (DEG) MIN (DEG)

363214

27189

SERIES 5580 REED SWITCHREPEATABILITY


± .18± .19± .74

HYSTERESIS(DEGREES)

± .53± .63± .63


313116

201412

SERIES 5580 HALL EFFECT SWITCHREPEATABILITY


± .09± .10± .11

HYSTERESIS(DEGREES)

± .26± .28± .35


271411

1498

.213[5.4].531

[13.5].732

[18.6]

A————

.788[20.0]

RFSx14

RFSx20

RFSx25

UNITSIZE

.457[11.6].720

[18.3]1.913[48.6]

CLETTER DIMENSION


B D————

1.902[48.3]

3D-36

3D



ACCESSORIES: SERIES RF ROTARY ACTUATOR


GRT MOUNTING KITThe PHD Series RF Rotary Actuator features a mounting hole

pattern that directly connects specific sizes of the PHD Series GRTGripper to the hub. This mounting kit provides the necessarymounting hardware for mounting a Series GRT Gripper onto aSeries RF Rotary Actuator.

SHP MOUNTING KITThe PHD Series RF Rotary Actuator features a mounting hole

pattern that directly connects specific sizes of the PHD Series SHPSlides to the hub. This mounting kit provides the necessarymounting hardware for mounting a Series SHP Slides to a Series RFRotary Actuator.

BLANK TRANSITION PLATEMOUNTING KIT

This accessory provides for the mounting of devices other thanPHD Series GRT Grippers and Series SHP Slides to the Series RFRotary Actuator. The kit includes an anodized, 6061-T6 aluminum,transition plate, pre-drilled to mount to the rotary actuator hub,along with the associated mounting hardware. The mounting holesfor the secondary unit are to be machined by the customer.

GRT GRIPPER

SHP SLIDE

BLANKTRANSITION PLATE

SERIES RFROTARY ACTUATOR

SERIES GRTMOUNTING KIT

SERIES SHPMOUNTING KIT

TRANSITION PLATEMOUNTING KIT

Ø C (SLIDE RETACTED)Ø C(GRIPPER OPEN )

(A)

B

(A)


SHP DIMENSIONSGRT DIMENSIONS

GRT MOUNTING KIT

KIT NO.

SERIES GRTGRIPPERUNIT SIZE

UNITSIZE


Nm[2.3][2.3][4.5][4.5][15.8][15.8]

in-lb20204040140140

GRT112GRT512GRT122GRT522GRT142GRT542

697266974169727697426972869743

FASTENERSIZE

5-40 x 1[ M3 x 0.5 x 25 ]

8-32 x 1 1/8[ M4 x 0.7 x 30 ]1/4-20 x 1 5/8

[ M6 x 1.0 x 40 ]

REQUIREDTORQUE

SHP MOUNTING KIT

KIT NO.

SERIES SHPSLIDE

UNIT SIZEUNITSIZE


Nm[2.3][2.3][2.3][2.3][4.5][4.5]

in-lb202020204040

SHP108 x 40SHP508 x 40SHP112 x 40SHP512 x 40SHP116 x 55SHP516 x 55

697036970669704697076970569708

FASTENERSIZE

5-40 x 5/8[ M3 x 0.5 x 16 ]

5-40 x 7/8[ M3 x 0.5 x 20 ]

6-32 x 1[ M4 x 0.7 x 30 ]

REQUIREDTORQUE

BLANK TRANSITION PLATE MOUNTING KIT

KIT NO.

BLANKTRANSITIONPLATE NO.

UNITSIZE


Nm[2.3][2.3][4.5][4.5][15.8][15.8]

in-lb20204040140140

69721-169721-569722-169722-569723-169723-5

697296973269730697336973169734

TRANSITIONPLATESIZE

.312 x Ø 2.205 [7.9 x Ø 56.0].433 x Ø 3.346[11.0 x Ø 85.0].500 x Ø 3.583[12.7 x Ø 91.0]

REQUIREDTORQUE

5-40 x 3/8[M3 x 0.5 x 10]

8-32 x 1/2[M4 x 0.7 x 12]

1/4-20 x 5/8[M6 x 1.0 x 16]

FASTENERSIZE

CUSTOMER SUPPLIED DOWEL PINSSERIES GRT

GRIPPERPIN SIZE

UNITSIZE


Ø 1/8 x 3/8[Ø 3 x 12]

Ø 3/16 x 5/8[Ø 4 x 16]Ø 1/4 x 3/4[Ø 6 x 20]

SERIES SHPSLIDE

PIN SIZE——————

BLANKTRANSITION

PLATE PIN SIZEØ 1/8 x 1/2[Ø 3 x 14]

Ø 3/16 x 3/4[Ø 4 x 18]Ø 1/4 x 3/4[Ø 6 x 20]

1.607[40.8]2.107[53.5]2.712[68.9]

A.197[5.0].039[1.0].433

[11.0]


UNITSIZE

LETTER DIMENSION


B3.823[97.1]4.733

[120.2]5.835

[148.2]

Ø C2.038[51.8]2.756[70.0]3.696[93.9]

A2.132[54.2]2.792[70.9]3.898[99.0]


UNITSIZE

LETTER DIMENSIONØ B

3D-37

3D



ROTARY ACTUATOR SELECTION: SERIES RF

SIZING A SERIES RF UNIT BASED ONTORQUE OUTPUT AND STOPPING CAPACITY

SIZINGA number of factors must be considered when selecting a

Series RF Rotary Actuator. These include actuator orientation, totalload attached and rotational speed. The process of selecting theproper Series RF rotary actuator consists of three main steps:

1) Size the actuator based on the torque requirements2) Size the actuator based on stopping capacity3) Size the actuator based on bearing capacity

Choose the actuator which meets the requirements of yourapplication.

STEP 1Determine Rotational Mass Moment of Inertia (Jm)Select the illustration from the application types on page3D-40 that most resembles your specific application. Severalseparate calculations may be necessary to fully describe yourapplication. Using the appropriate application equation,calculate the mass moment of inertia for the type of conditionillustrated. The total mass moment of inertia is the sum of theindividual calculations.

STEP 2Determine Necessary Acceleration (αA)This equation calculates the acceleration necessary to movethrough the required angle of rotation in the specified time. Theresults are given in radians/sec2.

STEP 3Calculate the Required Starting Torque (TA)Select the illustration from the application types on page3D-40 that most resembles your specific application. Severalseparate calculations may be necessary to fully describe yourapplication. Using the appropriate application equation,calculate the torque for each for each type of conditionillustrated that matches your application. The total torque willbe the sum of the individual calculations. Note: Torquecalculations are theoretical, an appropriate safety factorshould be considered. PHD recommends a minimum safetyfactor of 2 to account for friction loss, air line and valve size,and attached accessories.

SIZING A SERIES RF UNIT BASED ONSTOPPING CAPACITY

STEP 4Calculate the Peak Velocity (ω)This formula estimates the peak velocity of the Series RF inoperation, and is used to determine the stopping capacity ofthe rotary actuator. The result is given in radians/sec.

STEP 5Compare Peak Velocity (ω) to Allowable ImpactCompare the peak velocity to the maximum allowablevelocity for the given Mass Moment of Inertia (Jm) of yourapplication. The chart is labeled Shock Pad EnergyCapacity. The charts represent the total amount of energy thatis able to be absorbed and provide acceptable motion of theactuator. Acceptable motion is defined as a maximum of onedegree of motion reversal when the load comes to the end ofstroke. Note: The unit may be run at slightly higher velocitiesand loads than these charts indicate without damage; however,the motion profile may be unacceptable. Please contact PHD ifthe Series RF Rotary Actuator is to be used outside of therecommended energy range. If the shock pad does not provideenough stopping capacity for the application, the next largersize of actuator should be considered.

(Time of Rotation in Seconds)2Acceleration (rad/sec2) = αA = .035 x Rotation Angle in Degrees

Rotational Angle in DegreesTime of Rotation in Seconds

Average Velocity (deg/sec) =

Peak Velocity = .024 x Average Velocity

SHOCK PAD ENERGY CAPACITY

0.0

2.0

4.0

6.0

8.0

10.0

12.0

14.0

16.0

0 0.005[.00057]

0.01[.00113]

0.015[.00169]

0.02[.00226]

Attached Load, Moment Of Inertia (in-lb-sec2) [Nm-s2]

Allo

wab

le Im

pact

Vel

ocity

(rad

/sec

)

RFSx25

RFSx20

RFSx14

Starting Torque (in/lb) = TA, TAg

Balanced Load TA = Jm x αA x SFUnbalanced Load TAg = [(Jm x αA) + (Fg x k)] x SF

3D-38

3D




SIZING A SERIES RF UNIT BASED ON BEARINGCAPACITY

STEP 6The charts on the next page are divided into two categories.

The charts on the left are used when axial and radial loads areknown. Use these charts to determine if your application is withinthe allowable attached load for a specific size. Refer to the propercharts based on your intended actuator orientation and load. Thecharts on the next page are used when the load is defined and thedistance of the center of gravity of the load from the center ofrotation or face of the rotary actuator is known. See the illustrationbelow.

Using Known Axial and Radial GraphsIf the application is strictly axial the unit can be loaded up to

the maximum shown on the X axis. If there is combined axial andradial loading, check the known values against the maximumindicated in the chart. The line in the center is the point where theaxial load is matched to the radial load. This is the maximum loadthat can be applied in combined loading applications. Also be awarethat the distance from the face of the hub to the center of gravity iscritical in determining the reaction force back at the bearing. If exactradial and axial loads are unknown, PHD recommends using theLoad vs. CG Distance charts on the next page.

Using Known Load and Center of Gravity DistanceIf there is an unbalanced load, refer to the chart labeled Load

vs. CG Distance, this chart takes into account reactionary forces andshows the allowable load at a given center of gravity distance.Check the application against this chart for proper selection.

Horizontal Orientation (in)(CG)= Distance from Face of Hub to

Center of Gravity of Load

Vertical Orientation (in)(CG)= Distance from Centerline of Hub

to Center of Gravity of Load

CG

Cg

3D-39

3D




LOAD

CGDistance

LOAD

Radial Load

LOAD

Axial Load

7.60[33.81]

AXIAL VS. RADIAL LOAD LIMITS LOAD VS. CENTER OF GRAVITY DISTANCE

RFSx25

0

1[4.45]

2[8.90]

3[13.35]

4[17.79]

5[22.24]

0 1[4.45]

2[8.90]

6[26.69]

5[22.24]

3[13.35]

4[17.79]

Axial Load lb [N]

Radi

al L

oad

lb [N

]

7[31.14]

7[31.14]

6[26.69]

8[35.59]

Maximum Radial Load

Combined Maximum Load

RFSx20

0

0.50[2.22]

1.0[4.45]

1.5[6.67]

2.0[8.90]

2.5[11.12]

3.0[13.35]

3.5[15.57]

4.0[17.79]

4.5[20.02]

5.0[22.24]

0 0.5[2.22]

1[4.45]

1.5[6.67]

2[8.90]

2.5[11.12]

3[13.35]

3.5[15.57]

4[17.79]

Axial Load lb [N]

Radi

al L

oad

lb [N

]

Maximum Radial Load


RFSx14

0

0.50[2.22]

1.0[4.45]

1.5[6.67]

2.0[8.90]

2.5[11.12]

0 0.2[0.89]

1[4.45]

2[8.90]

Axial Load lb [N]

Radi

al L

oad

lb [N

]

0.4[1.78]

0.6[2.67]

0.8[3.56]

1.2[5.34]

1.4[6.23]

1.6[7.12]

1.8[8.01]

Maximum Radial Load


RFSx14

00 0.2

[5.08]1

[25.4]

Center of Gravity Distance in [mm]

Load

lb [N

]

0.4[10.16]

0.6[15.24]

0.8[20.32]

1.2[30.48]

1.4[35.56]

0.2[0.89]

1[4.45]

0.4[1.78]

0.6[2.67]

0.8[3.56]

1.2[5.34]

1.4[6.23]

RFSx20

00 0.5

[12.7]1

[25.4]


Load

lb [N

]

2[50.8]

1.5[38.1]

2.5[63.5]

0.5[2.22]

2[8.90]

1[4.45]

1.5[6.67]

2.5[11.12]

3[13.35]

RFSx25

00 0.5

[12.7]1

[25.4]


Load

lb [N

]

3.5[88.9]

3[76.2]

2.5[63.5]

4[101.6]

4.5[114.3]

0.5[2.22]

3.5[15.57]

1[4.45]

2.5[11.12]

3[13.35]

4[17.79]

4.5[20.02]

2[8.90]

1.5[6.67]

1.5[38.1]

2[50.8]

2.35[10.45]

4.55[20.24]

4.32[19.22]

Maximum Axial Load6.33

[28.16]

2.59[11.52]

Maximum Axial Load3.79

[16.86]

1.334[5.94]

Maximum AxialLoad1.96

[8.72]

1.334[5.94]

2.59[11.52]

4.32[19.22]

.899[4.00]

1.799[8.00]

2.811[12.50]

3D-40

3D




Jm = x k2Fg

g

Jm = x12

Fg

ga2 + 3k2

( ) ( )Fg1

gJm = x (4a2 + 3k2)

12+ xFg2

g(4b2 + 3k2)

12

b-a2


( )k2Jm = +L2

3Fg

gxx 1

4









Jm = x 4a2 + c2

12+ x 4b2 + c2

12Fg1

gFg2

g

Jm = x x k225

Fg

g

Point Load

LOAD ORIENTATION



UNBALANCED LOADS

T = Jm x α x SF

UNBALANCED LOADS

Jm = x k2

2Fg

g

a2 + b2

12Jm = xFg

g

k

L

k k


aa

b

c

Fg2

aFg1

b


a Fg1

Fg2

bk

Fg

IMPERIAL UNITS:Jm = Rotational Mass Moment of Inertia (in-lb-sec2) (Dependent on physical size of object and weight)g = Gravitational Constant = 386.4 in/sec2 Fg = Weight of Load (lb) k = Radius of Gyration (in)T = Torque required to rotate load (in-lbs) α = Acceleration (rad/sec2) t = time (sec)SF = Safety Factor



3D-41

3D



SIZING EXAMPLE: SERIES RF ROTARY ACTUATOR

APPLICATION INFORMATION - EXAMPLE 1Weight = .75 lb + .25 lb PlateRotation Angle = 180°Pressure = 65 psiOrientation = VerticalCenter of Gravity Distance = 1.125" for .75 lb

.5" for .25 lbDesired Cycle Rate = .35 secSafety Factor = 2Axial Load = .75 lb + .25 lb

EXAMPLE 1STEP 1

Determine Jm of Plate mounted off center

gJm =

12x

Jm = .0008633 in-lb-sec2

g+

12x

386.4 12x +

386.4 12x

(.0002148 x .6667) + (.000432195 x 1.6667)

.000143 + .000720326

Fg1 4a2 + c2 Fg2 4b2 + c2

.083 4(1)2 + (2)2 .167 4(2)2 + (2)2

Determine Point Load

gJm = x

386.4xJm = (1.125)2.75

xJm = .0019409 1.2656

Jm = .002456 in-lb-sec2

Jm Total = .00086 + .00245 = .00331 in-lb-sec2

FgK2

STEP 2Determine Acceleration

αA =

(.35)2

51.429 rad/sec2

T = Jm x αA x SF

T = .00331 x 51.429 x 2

αA = .035 x

T = .3405 in-lb

(Time of Rotation in Seconds)2Acceleration (rad/sec2) = αA =

180

.035 x Rotation Angle in Degrees

STEP 3Starting Torque

STEP 4Calculate Peak Velocity

Average Velocity =.35

= 514.28 deg/sec

Peak Velocity = .024 x 514.28 = 12.34 rad/sec

Peak Velocity = .024 x Average Velocity(rad/sec)

180

STEP 5Compare the Peak Velocity

Compare this value to the Shock Pad Energy Capacity chart onpage 11. We see the following:

• The size 14 will not handle the Jm value.

• The size 20 will not attain the speed required.

• The size 25 will perform the task in the desired time.

STEP 6Determine the bearing capabilities of a Size 25Since we know the axial loading but not the radial loading for

this application, we compare it to the Load vs. CG Distance Chart onpage 3D-39.

At this loading condition the size 25 has the capability of 1 lb ataround 2.2 inches off center. Our application is at 1.125 inches.

Therefore; the RFSx25 is suitable for this application.

1.125"

.25 lb

CG

.75 lb.5"

2"

3D-42

3D




APPLICATION INFORMATION - EXAMPLE 2Weight = 1.5 lbRotation Angle = 180°Pressure = 60 psiOrientation = HorizontalCenter of Gravity Distance = .5"Desired Cycle Rate = .5 secSafety Factor = 2Axial Load = ØCycles per minute = 20

EXAMPLE 2STEP 1

Determine Jm(Equation is from page 14, Disk Mounted on Center)


STEP 3Starting Torque(Equation is from page 14)



Check this value against the Shock Pad Energy Capacity charton page 3D-37.

• The size 14 cannot handle the Jm value of .0038. The size 14cannot stop the load.

• The size 20 can stop the load and perform the task in therequired time.

STEP 6Determining the bearing capabilities of a Size 20.

We now check the loading condition against the Load vs. CGDistance chart for the size 20 on page 3D-39.

We see that a size 20 can handle approximately 2 lbs at.5 inches from center of gravity distance.

Therefore; the RFSx20 is suitable for this application.

Jm = .00328 in-lb-sec2

386.4xJm = (1.3)2

21.5

gJm =

2xFg K2

αA =

(.5)2

25.2 rad/sec2

T = Jm x αA x SF

T = .00328 x 25.2 x 2

αA = .035 x

T = .165 in-lb


180


Average Velocity =.5

= 360 degrees/sec

Peak Velocity = .024 x 360 = 8.64 rad/sec

Peak Velocity = .024 x Average Velocity (rad/sec)

180

1"

2.60 Ø

3D-43

3D




APPLICATION INFORMATION - EXAMPLE 3Weight = 1.75 lbRotation Angle = 180°Pressure = 80 psiOrientation = VerticalCenter of Gravity Distance = ØDesired Cycle Rate = 1.0 secSafety Factor = 2Axial Load = 1.75 lb (weight)Cycles per minute = 30

EXAMPLE 3STEP 1

Determine Jm(Equation is from page 14, Disk Mounted on Center)


STEP 3Starting Torque(Equation is from page 3D-40)



Compare this value to the Shock Pad Energy Capacity chart onpage 11.

• The size 14 will handle the Jm value at the rated PeakVelocity.

STEP 6Determine the bearing capabilities of size 14.

Use the Axial vs. Radial Load Limits chart for the RFSx14 onpage 3D-39.

Since we have only an axial load we can supportup to 1.96 lb.

Therefore; the Series RFSx14 is suitable for this application.

Jm = .0044 in-lb-sec2

386.4xJm = (1.4)2

2

gJm =

2xFg K2

1.75

αA =

(1.0)2

6.3 rad/sec2

T = Jm x αA x SF

T = .0044 x 6.3 x 2

αA = .035 x

T = .055 in/lb


180


Average Velocity =1.0

= 180 degrees/sec

Peak Velocity = .024 x Average Velocity (rad/sec)

Peak Velocity = .024 x 180 = 4.32 rad/sec

180

1"2.80 Ø

rotary actuators - phd

Documents